S4SCSD 20 en

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 256

User Guide | PUBLIC

SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution


2020-07-20

Application Help for S4SCSD


© 2020 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

THE BEST RUN


Content

1 SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


1.1 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Stock Analysis for Petroleum Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2 Tele Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Customer History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3 Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.4 Sales Document Creation in Tele Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5 Billing Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.6 Alternative Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 Delivery Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Assign Delivery Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Edit Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Edit Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.8 Equipment Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.9 Delivery Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.10 Display of Sales Key Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.11 Automatic Delivery Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.12 Payer Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.13 Financial Data Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.14 Open Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.15 Pre-Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Pre-Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.16 Telephony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.17 Multireference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.18 Reference Pricing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.19 Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Terminal Access ID List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sales Document Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Purchasing Document Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.20 Collective Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Customer Hierarchy Collective Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creating a Collective Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3 Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Application Help for S4SCSD


2 PUBLIC Content
3.1 CPR Customer Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Creating a Customer Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.2 Conducting an Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.3 Defining Default Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4 Analyzing the Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.5 Edit Stocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6 Delete Stocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.7 Display Change Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.8 Process Job Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3.9 Delete Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.10 Cyclical Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.11 Parallel Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4 Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57


4.1 Assigning Partners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.2 Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3 Master Data Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Role Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Integration in Business Partner (BP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Consistency Check for RFNO Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.4 Inbound Data Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Business Transaction Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Document Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reconciliation of Business Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
RFNO Consistency Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.5 RFNO document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
4.6 Processing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.7 Statuses in RFNO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.8 Dip Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.9 Payment Card Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Creating Payment Card Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Creating and Deleting a Payment Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Maintain Payment Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.10 Network Operations Desk (NODe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Launchpad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.11 Network Operations Reporting (NORe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.12 Personal Toolbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.13 Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Bucket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Creating and Deleting a CSR Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Application Help for S4SCSD


Content PUBLIC 3
Editing CSR Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Performing a CSR Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
CSR Postprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Service Station Overview (App). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.14 Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Competitor Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Location Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Report Competitor Prices (App). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

5 Data Collation (DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125


5.1 Document Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2 Item Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.3 Creating and Posting a Data Collation Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.4 Cancellation of a Data Collation Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.5 Handling mass posting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.6 Freight Cost Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.7 Material Transfer Posting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.8 Country-Specific Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Portugal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.9 Document Categories and Item Categories in Data Collation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.10 Statuses in Data Collation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

6 Interfaces (IF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158


6.1 Interface Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.2 Copying Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.3 Web Interface Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7 Process Automation Toolset (PAT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162


7.1 Locator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

8 Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170


8.1 Trip Planning (TP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Assign Dispatcher (App). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Start Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Processing Trips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Delivery Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Plant and Contract Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Mixed Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Business Partner Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Equipment and Transport Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Locating Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Application Help for S4SCSD


4 PUBLIC Content
Trip Confirmation with Data Collation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Trip-Related Data Collation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
PPF integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

9 Integrated Dispatch Management (App). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

10 Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229


10.1 Archiving Notes Using /ICO/NOTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2 Archiving Interface Documents Using /ICO/OOIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.3 Archiving DC Documents with /PAT/DOCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
10.4 Archiving RFNO Payment Cards Using /ICO/RNPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.5 Archiving of RFNO Inbound Process Data Using /ICO/RNPOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
10.6 Archive IDM Data with /BTL/ARC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

11 Data Aging in S4SCSD 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247


11.1 Available Data Aging Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

12 Business Functions S4SCSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


12.1 Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12.2 Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12.3 Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.4 Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Application Help for S4SCSD


Content PUBLIC 5
1 SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for
secondary distribution (S4SCSD)

Use

The SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution solution enables you to map all business processes
required in the petroleum trade with end customers, wholesalers, resellers, or service stations. It comprises the
purchase, storage, transportation, and sale of fuels and lubricants.

It contains the following functional areas:

● Tele Sales (TS)


● Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
● Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
● Data Collation (DC)
● Interfaces (IF)
● Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)

Prerequisites

You have configured the /BTL/IDM_ALL area menu.

Implementation Considerations

SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution is an SAP Oil & Gas add-on that uses functions from IS-
Oil Downstream. Integration with the industry solution Oil & Gas is guaranteed.

You cannot implement SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution on its own. It must be
implemented in conjunction with IS-Oil Downstream (for example, functions for oil quantity conversion) and
SAP ERP (for example, Sales and Distribution functions).

Related Information

Tele Sales [page 9]


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) [page 44]
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]
Data Collation (DC) [page 125]

Application Help for S4SCSD


6 PUBLIC SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD)
Interfaces (IF) [page 158]
Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) [page 170]

1.1 Reporting

In Data Collation (DC), you can evaluate and display data.

You have this report available:

● Stock Analysis
Creates a list of the quantities and movements of a material in a plant within a storage location.

Related Information

Stock Analysis for Petroleum Products [page 7]

1.1.1 Stock Analysis for Petroleum Products

Creates a list of the storage quantities of a plant for a material, and a list of the material movements that have
taken place.

Use

Combines and displays the quantities and collective material movements for one or more materials and other
search criteria over a selected posting period. The quantities are displayed in up to ten different units of
measure.

Activities

For the storage report, go to the SAP Menu, and choose S4SCSD General Reporting Start Stock
Analysis .

The data found is displayed in the Quantities and Movements areas. You can move the order of the columns,
and sort and filter the contents of the columns.

You can use Search to search for entries. The search results are highlighted in color in the list.

Export to Spreadsheet allows you to export the content.

Application Help for S4SCSD


SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD) PUBLIC 7
You can use Settings to make adjustments, for example, for the layout, sorting, and filtering.

Messages are displayed in the header. To view all messages, choose Display Message Log.

Search Criteria
The entries for the material and the date fields are mandatory. The Posting Date From field is filled with the first
day of the current month by default. The Posting Date To field is filled with the current date by default. Change
this data if necessary. After entering the other data you require, choose Search. The material quantities and the
material movements are displayed in a separate area.

You can save your search criteria as a variant under Save Search As.

Quantities
The existing material quantities are displayed according to your search criteria.

To form totals, choose the Calculations tab page under Settings.

The system displays the stocks at the start and end of the search period. Negative values are indicated with a
minus sign (-).

Movements
The existing goods movements are displayed according to your search criteria.

To go to a document, select a line. Choose the corresponding pushbutton.

● DC Document: Transaction /PAT/UI_MAIN_CALLDisplay PAT Document


● Material DocumentMIGOGoods Movement
● Purchasing Document: Transaction ME23Display Extended Purchase Order
● Sales Doc.: Transaction VL03NDisplay Outbound Delivery

Integration

Fiori Launchpad (FLP)


To get the feature in FLP, you need to assign this role there:

● SAP_BR_DATACOLL_SCSD

Application Help for S4SCSD


8 PUBLIC SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD)
2 Tele Sales

Purpose

This component contains all the functions and information that you need for telephone sales. Telephone sales
are supported by evaluations in the areas of sales, procurement, and settlement.

You can call most processes and functions from the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen screen. You access this
screen by choosing SAP Menu Tele Sales Create Sales Order . You can call other processes and
functions straight from the menu.

Implementation Considerations

Tele Sales is an enhancement of the standard sales order. This function has been enhanced so that a telephone
salesperson for fuels, lubricants, and bottled gas can use this as a permanent work environment for telephone
sales.

In addition to functional enhancements to the standard sales order transaction for the petroleum trade, SAP S/
4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD) also contains a simplified screen layout for direct
access to the data that is relevant for the salesperson.

In Tele Sales, you can display additional information as individual values or in the form of lists. This requires
special Customizing settings.

2.1 Notes

Use

You can use this function to create notes about a customer or have the system create notes automatically. The
system can create up to three different notes. You can use notes as reminders and set them for resubmission
(RS), or have them printed on the delivery note or invoice. You can send and archive the notes as an SAP IDoc.

Prerequisites

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for Tele Sales by choosing:

● Notes
● Posting Control

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 9
 Note

For printing, the appropriate form must exist and you must have configured the print program accordingly
in the system.

Features

You can create notes manually here:

● Tele Sales

The system automatically creates notes according to the settings in Customizing for Posting Control in the
following applications:

● Tele Sales
○ When you save an SD document such as an inquiry, quotation, or contract
○ When you create a new customer using Fast Customer Creation
○ When you generate an activity

Short Text

When the system creates a note automatically, it generates a text with a maximum of 40 characters. In
Customizing for Notes, you can predefine standard texts that would then have priority over the generated texts.
You can overwrite any text that was created automatically.

Long Text

In Tele Sales, you can enter a long text for the note if the short text is not sufficient.

Resubmission

During manual creation, you can specify a resubmission date in Tele Sales and in the notes.

When you create an SD document, the system automatically defines a resubmission date in Tele Sales that is
the same as the valid-to date in the SD document. You define the date determination in Customizing under
Tele Sales Posting Control Set Parameters for Creation of Sales Documents . When you save the SD
document, you can overwrite the proposed date.

The system automatically creates a resubmission date in the notes. You define the date in Customizing for Tele
Sales under Notes Note Activities Define Note Activity Types .

Printing Out Notes

You can use an indicator in Tele Sales and in the notes to define that the note text should be printed on the
delivery note or invoice for the customer.

Note Processing

In the Tele Sales menu under Notes Process Notes , you can display and process all activities and notes.

Sending Notes

In the Tele Sales menu under Notes Send Notes , you can send notes as an SAP IDoc. You can perform a
test run before sending. You can also send in batch mode. For more information, see the report documentation.

Application Help for S4SCSD


10 PUBLIC Tele Sales
Archiving Notes

In the Tele Sales menu under Notes Archive Notes , you can archive notes.

Related Information

Activities [page 11]


Generation of Activities [page 12]
Tele Sales [page 9]
Archiving Notes Using /ICO/NOTE [page 229]

2.1.1 Activities

Purpose

You use this process to perform activities for delivery satisfaction and buying patterns of your customers.
Three reports are available for this.

Prerequisites

You have made the required settings in Customizing for Tele Sales, under Notes Note Activities .

Process Flow

Perform the following steps:

1. Generate an activity.
2. Manage the activity.
3. Evaluate the activity.

 Note

In the Tele Sales menu, under Notes Process Notes , you can display and process all activities and
notes.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 11
Example

You want to do a survey by telephone to find out if your customers were satisfied with the deliveries they
received from you.

Generate an activity of type Delivery Satisfaction with the customers you want to survey.

Release the activity under Manage Activities.

Enter the results of the survey in the Tele Sales menu, under Notes Process Notes .

Evaluate the results of the survey under Evaluate Activities.

Related Information

Management of Activities [page 13]


Generation of Activities [page 12]
Evaluation of Activities [page 14]

2.1.1.1 Generation of Activities

Use

You use this report to generate activities for certain note classes defined in Customizing.

Prerequisites

You have defined note activity types in Customizing for Tele Sales, by choosing Notes Note Activities
Define Note Activity Types and have made the necessary settings under Define Customer Sales Analysis.

Features

You can generate activities for buying patterns and delivery satisfaction of customers.

Activities

Generate Activity for Buying Analysis

Application Help for S4SCSD


12 PUBLIC Tele Sales
1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Tele Sales Notes Generate Activities .
2. The Activities screen appears. Select a buying analysis.
3. Enter the sales organization, a billing type, and if required, additional data, before choosing Execute. The
Create Notes for Purchase Analysis screen appears.
4. Select the customers you want to take into consideration during the analysis.
5. Choose Execute. The Text for Note Activity dialog box appears. Enter a text for the note and choose
Continue.
6. The system creates a note ID.

Generate Activity for Delivery Satisfaction

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Tele Sales Notes Generate Activities .
The Activities screen appears. Select the delivery satisfaction class LZU.
2. Enter the data and choose Execute. The Creation of Notes for Delivery Satisfaction screen appears.
3. Select the customers you want to take into consideration during the analysis.
4. Choose Execute. The Text for Note Activity dialog box appears. Enter a text for the note and choose
Continue.
5. The system creates a note ID.

2.1.1.2 Management of Activities

Use

You can use this report to generate a list of activities in which you can set the activity status.

Prerequisites

You have generated [page 12] an activity.

Activities

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Tele Sales Notes Manage Activities .
2. Enter a note ID and choose Continue. The Process Activities screen appears.
3. Select a row and choose a status. The selected status is displayed.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 13
2.1.1.3 Evaluation of Activities

Use

You can use this report to evaluate generated and processed activities.

Prerequisites

You have generated [page 12] and processed [page 13] an activity.

Activities

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Tele Sales Notes Evaluate Activities . The Activities screen appears.
2. Select a row and choose Execute. The Evaluate Activities for Activity Type <activity type> Note Type <note
type> screen appears. Enter an activity and choose Execute.
The systems shows the result in tabular form.

2.2 Customer History

Use

This function enables you to view the customer's history, that is, you can display sales documents from the
past.

The system updates the data to the following tables:

● VBAK Sales Document: Header Data


● VBAP Sales Document: Item Data
● VBKD Sales Document: Commercial Data
● LIKP Sales Document: Delivery: Header Data
● LIPS Sales Document: Delivery: Item Data

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview or Change <order type>: Overview screen.

Application Help for S4SCSD


14 PUBLIC Tele Sales
Features

You can choose different tab pages from the history tabstrip. The individual tab page screens consist of a
navigation area in the form of a tree structure and a table area. In the tree structure, you select what is to be
displayed in the table.

By selecting the various tab pages, you can see the different histories, for example, for different sales
document types. You can also choose a material ranking list and the latest deliveries.

You specify which tab pages are to be displayed in Customizing for Tree Tools, under Tabstrips.

You can copy item data from the table view of the Material Ranking List and Latest Deliveries tab pages as a new
item.

● Drag an item to the shopping cart of the item view.


● Select an item and choose Document.

In both cases, the system copies the data and creates a new item.

To display a document or an archived document, select a document number in the table view and choose
Display.

2.3 Items

You can enter the items for the sales document. Various functions are available to support this.

Use

In this area, you can enter the item data for the sales document.

Features

In addition to the standard functions, you can use additional functions. These additional functions are as
follows:

Shopping Cart
From the customer history, you can drag items from the material ranking list and the latest deliveries to the
shopping cart. An item is then created automatically.

Requested Delivery Date


First select a format. Then select the value. The selected format is then valid for all items.

This value controls which week view is displayed in pre-scheduling.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 15
Delivering Plant
Here you enter a delivering plant that is valid for all items.

Condition Type
Enter the condition type that is to be displayed in the items.

Display TAS Data


You can display the TAS data for a TAS-relevant material.

Toggle Amount/Value
You can choose whether the amount or the value is displayed. The amount relates to the unit of measure and
the value is the product of multiplying the amount by the order quantity.

No freight and commission amounts are contained in the condition type OGM5 for margins.

Pre-Scheduling
You access pre-scheduling.

Contract Selection List


The system displays a list of the purchase contracts. You can select a contract from the list.

When you enter a third-party plant while creating an item, the contract selection list is also displayed.

 Note

You define third-party plants in Customizing, under SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary
Distribution (S4SCSD) General Settings Classify Plants .

Contract Detail List


The detailed view of the purchasing contract appears.

Multireference
This takes you directly to the overview of the reference documents.

Number of Delivery Notes


Choose Item Detail. Enter the number of delivery notes to be printed in the General Data group box. You can
only print documents when print control is set up correctly.

 Note

If required, you must adjust the print output program for this function.

Terminal Access Identification Number


Choose Item Detail. Enter the terminal access identification number in the General Data group box.

You make the required settings in Customizing for Tele Sales under General Settings Set Terminal Access
Identification Number Assignment . If the print control is set up accordingly, the terminal access identification
number is printed.

Application Help for S4SCSD


16 PUBLIC Tele Sales
 Note

If required, you must adjust the print output program for this function.

Related Information

Pre-Scheduling [page 27]


Multireference [page 34]

2.4 Sales Document Creation in Tele Sales

Use

This function enables you to create one of the following sales documents directly on the Create <order
type>: Overview screen by choosing the appropriate pushbutton:

● Inquiry
● Quotation
● Contract

When you choose the Save pushbutton, a sales order is created.

Activities

After you save the data, you can open the Create <document> – Parameter dialog box by choosing the
appropriate pushbutton.

Change or accept the default data and, if necessary, enter the customer's order number.

 Note

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, under Tele Sales Posting
Control Set Parameters for Creation of Sales Documents , you can define the validity period for the
document types. A note is also created for the validity end date/time and a review date is set.

Related Information

Notes [page 9]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 17
2.5 Billing Block

Use

This function shows you whether or not a billing block is set for the customer.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Activities

If a billing block is set, a red flag is displayed to the right of the input field for the customer.

If you see a green flag , it means that a billing block is not set.

2.6 Alternative Address

Use

You can use alternative addresses so that you do not have to create additional delivery addresses as ship-to
parties in the system.

You can make settings in print control so that the alternative address is printed on the delivery note.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Features

You can enter alternative addresses for the entire document as well as for each item.

The system issues a temporary address number that is replaced with a final number when you save the data.

Application Help for S4SCSD


18 PUBLIC Tele Sales
Activities

Create and change an alternative address

1. Choose Ship-to Party Detail. The Address from Master Data for Ship-to party (Document header) dialog box
appears.
2. Enter the address data. Save your entries.

Or

1. Choose Ship-To Party Items. The Ship-To Parties - Alternative Addresses dialog box appears.
2. Choose Create Alternative Address or Change Alternative Address. Save your entries.

You can only create an alternative address for an item if you have created at least one item in Tele Sales.

Delete an alternative address

You can delete an alternative address if it has not been saved yet. These addresses have the prefix WE.

1. Choose Ship-To Party Items.


2. Select the address you want to delete.
3. Choose Delete Alternative Address. A dialog box appears in which you can select a new alternative address.

Select an alternative address

1. Choose Ship-To Party Items. The Ship-To Parties - Alternative Addresses dialog box appears.
2. Enter the alternative address for the document in the Ship-To Party Header group box or the alternative
address for one or more items in the Ship-To Party Items group box. Save your entries.

Or

1. Choose Alternative Addresses.


2. Copy an alternative address for the document.

Display an alternative address

Choose Alternative Addresses.

Example

Your customer, who is an employer at a road construction company, is temporarily managing a construction
site. The customer wants all deliveries, such as diesel for the construction vehicles, to be delivered straight to
the construction site rather than to the company's head office.

2.7 Delivery Conditions

Describes how you define delivery conditions that you can use for delivering to a customer in tele sales.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 19
Use

For delivery to a customer, it may be necessary for certain conditions to be met. If the receiving transportation
unit meets this condition, the transportation unit can carry out the delivery.

During order entry, you enter the conditions that must be met.

The delivery conditions can be printed on the delivery note. To do this, you must adjust the print program
accordingly.

Example

● To fill a tank at a customer site, a hose at least 50 meters long is necessary. The vehicle must therefore be
equipped with a 50-meter-long hose.
● A gas station can only be supplied by a truck that bears the logo of the gas station.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for the Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream), under TD (Transportation and Distribution)
TD Master Data Compatibilities Maintain Vehicle / Customer Compatibility Indicators , you have defined
the characteristics.

Related Information

Assign Delivery Conditions [page 20]


Edit Characteristics [page 21]
Edit Groups [page 22]
Tele Sales [page 9]

2.7.1 Assign Delivery Conditions

Describes how you assign delivery conditions to a customer and edit these in tele sales.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose S4SCSD Tele Sales (TS) and start a transaction for the sales
order. Enter the data. Choose Continue.

Application Help for S4SCSD


20 PUBLIC Tele Sales
2. On the Create <order type>: Overview screen, choose a customer.
3. Choose the Detail Delivery Condition pushbutton. This takes you to the Delivery Conditions for Customer
<Customer> dialog box.
4. Select the delivery conditions you require. Choose Copy. The Transfer dialog box appears.
If the combination of characteristics you have chosen already exists, you do not need to enter a group
name. In this case, step 5 is not applicable.
5. Enter a text for the group. Choose Save. The system assigns a sequential number.
6. Save the order.

You remove an assignment by deselecting the characteristics. Save your changes.

On the Create <order type>: Overview screen, the delivery condition for the customer is displayed with
number and text.

Related Information

Delivery Conditions [page 19]

2.7.2 Edit Characteristics

Describes how you can create, change, and delete characteristics in Customizing.

Procedure

In Customizing, choose Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) under TD (Transportation and Distribution)
TD Master Data Compatibilities Maintain Vehicle / Customer Compatibility Indicators .

○ Create
Choose New Entries. Enter a 4-character ID and a description. Save your entries.
○ Change
To change the text, make the changes. Save your changes.
○ Delete
Select an entry. Choose Delete.

 Note

Deletion is only possible if the characteristic is not assigned. If necessary, expand the assignment in
the transaction Maintain Cust. Group O4BC.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 21
Related Information

Delivery Conditions [page 19]


Edit Groups [page 22]

2.7.3 Edit Groups

Describes how to create and delete groups in the master data.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose SAP Logistics Sales and Distribution Bulk
Transportation Master Data Compatibilities Indicator Assignment Maintain Customer Group .
2. The system displays the dialog box entitled Condition Customer Group for Reconciliation (Compatibility).

○ Create
1. Choose Maintain Group. Enter an 8-character ID and a description. Save your entries.
2. Choose Assignments. Select the characteristics. Save the assignments.

○ Delete
1. Enter a group.
2. Choose Assignments. Choose Remove Selection. Save your entries.
3. Choose Maintain Group. Select a group. Choose Delete.

 Note

If the group is still assigned to a customer, the system will display a corresponding message.
You must first remove the delivery condition from the customer in tele sales. Open the
customer in tele sales. Choose Detail Delivery Conditions Change Cancel Transfer
Save .

Related Information

Delivery Conditions [page 19]

Application Help for S4SCSD


22 PUBLIC Tele Sales
2.8 Equipment Data

Use

This function enables you to enter and display equipment data for a customer.

The information entered provides you with an overview of the technical equipment and other parameters of the
customer's heating installation.

Integration

To call evaluations for equipment data, on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary
distribution screen, choose SAP Menu Tele Sales (TS) Evaluations Equipment Data .

The following evaluations are available:

● Next Tank Cleaning


● Maintenance Companies
● Natural Gas Connection Data
● Consumption Data
● Burner and Boiler Data

Prerequisites

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary
distribution, under Tele Sales (TS) Equipment .

Activities

To enter equipment data, on the Create< order type>: Overview screen, choose Equipment Detail.

To switch between the equipment data that you want to display, choose Other Equipment.

Example

By looking at the heated area and the tank volume, you can tell when you will need to supply the customer with
new heating oil and can contact the customer in time to create an order.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 23
2.9 Delivery Block

Use

This function shows you whether or not a delivery block is set for the ship-to party.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Activities

If a delivery block is set, a red flag is displayed to the right of the input field for the ship-to party.

If you see a green flag , it means that a delivery block is not set.

2.10 Display of Sales Key Figures

Use

This function shows you values for sales volume, turnover, and revenue, sorted according to material group.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

You define the texts for the sales key figures in Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary
distribution (S4SCSD) under Tele Sales General Settings Define Texts for Sales Key Figures .

Activities

● To display all the data in another window, choose Sales Key Figures Detail.
● To switch between the sales volume, turnover, and revenue data, choose Other Sales Key Figures.

Application Help for S4SCSD


24 PUBLIC Tele Sales
The system updates the data each time billing takes place.

2.11 Automatic Delivery Creation

Use

You use this function to control whether the system is to automatically create a delivery.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Activities

If you want the system to create a delivery, set the Delivery indicator and save the data as a sales order or a
contract.

 Note

When you perform data collation, you cannot reference the sales order or contract that you created. Data
collation would also create a delivery, which would lead to problems during subsequent posting steps.
Instead, you must reference a delivery that the system created.

2.12 Payer Indicator

Use

This function shows you whether the payer is different from the sold-to party.

Activities

If the sold-to party is not the payer, the system sets the ampersand ( & ) in the field next to the field for the
customer's credit limit. This means that the credit limit data of the payer and not of the sold-to party is
displayed on the Create<order type>: Overview screen.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 25
2.13 Financial Data Details

Use

With this function, you can display the details of the customer's financial data.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Activities

Choose Financial Data Detailed View.

The Financial and Payment Information of Customer <Customer Name> dialog box appears.

2.14 Open Items

Use

This function enables you to display amounts that are still due after the agreed payment date.

Prerequisites

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview screen.

Features

The amount due increases each time the billing document balance is not cleared by the required payment date.

The amount decreases when payment for an open item is received.

Application Help for S4SCSD


26 PUBLIC Tele Sales
Activities

If there are open items, a red flag is displayed to the left of the Due OI field.

If a green flag is displayed, this means that there are no open items.

2.15 Pre-Scheduling

Enables deadline pre-scheduling of an order.

Use

This function enables you to perform direct pre-scheduling of sales orders when you create a sales order in Tele
Sales. Pre-scheduling allows the Tele Sales employee to give the customer a provisional confirmation of the
delivery date.

You assign items from sales orders to time periods in a weekly overview. Based on the delivery location, the
system proposes a suitable delivery date. If the limit values set for delivery quantities or the number of items is
exceeded, this is also displayed. This gives you an overview of the routes that are planned for a given period,
along with the associated quantities. Items for which a goods issue has already been posted are not displayed.

You can perform pre-scheduling for each material planning group indicator that can contain multiple materials.
This enables you to schedule solids separately from liquids, for example.

Prerequisites

You have made the following settings in the S4SCSD master data, under Tele Sales (TS) Pre-Scheduling :

● Under Set Limit Values, you have defined the limit values. For each period, you can define maximum values
for the delivery quantity and for the number of items. If one of these values is exceeded, this is displayed in
pre-scheduling. Define limit values as default values for each weekday. If there are predictable deviations
from the default values, you can set running values. These running values then take precedence over the
default values. You need to distribute the limit values set for the delivery quantities proportionally across
the periods.
● Under Assign Material Planning Group Indicator to Material, you have assigned a material planning group
indicator (MPGI) to a material. You must first define an MPGI in Customizing.
● If the delivery zone is to be assigned per business partner, you assign a delivery zone to the business
partner in the transaction Maintain Business Partner in the Customer role, on the tab page Geo-Info/
Delivery Zones. If the delivery zone is to be assigned at postal-code level, under Assign Postal Codes to
Delivery Zone assign certain postal codes or postal code areas a delivery zone. If you have made both these
settings, the system uses the assignment to the business partner. If you want the assignment to the postal

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 27
code to be used first, you can set this in Customizing. To do this, choose Define Determination of Delivery
Zone. You can also assign a separate delivery zone assignment if necessary.

 Note

In the menu you can choose Display Delivery Zones for Ship-To Parties to view assignments.

In S4SCSD-Customizing, under Tele Sales (TS) Pre-Scheduling , you have made the following settings:

● Under Define Time Profiles, you have defined the time profiles.

Application Help for S4SCSD


28 PUBLIC Tele Sales
The following figure shows a possible time profile structure:

A time profile consists of periods. You can group periods in time frames. whereby each time frame must
also be defined as a period. You can assign a weekday to each period.
● Under Define Delivery Zones and Neighborhood Distance, you have defined the delivery zones and
neighborhood distance.
● Under Set Delivery Zone for Limits, you have set which delivery zone applies to the limits.
● Under Define Material Planning Group Indicator, you have created a material planning group indicator.
● Under Assign Time Profile to MPGI and Delivery Zone, you have assigned an MPGI and a delivery zone to the
time profile.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 29
● Under Define Determination of Delivery Zone, you can specify which determination of delivery zone the
system uses.
● Under Define Parameters for Limits, you have defined the parameters for the limits.

Features

Neighborhood Symbol
If you want to assign a new item to a time period in which another item has been assigned for the same
customer or for a customer that is in the close vicinity of the current customer, the neighborhood symbol Order
in Neighborhood is displayed in the Priority <date> column.

This is controlled by the settings defined in Customizing for Pre-Scheduling.

The symbol for information purposes only. You can ignore it.

Example of neighborhood distance:

A petroleum trader has defined four delivery zones. Delivery zone 02 should preferably be supplied on Tuesday.
Delivery zone 04 should preferably be supplied on Thursday. Ship-to party A has already been pre-scheduled in
delivery zone 02. Now, an additional item for ship-to party B is to be pre-scheduled in delivery zone 04. Since
the distance between A and B does not exceed the neighborhood distance defined in Customizing, the
neighborhood symbol is displayed. It makes sense to deliver item B at the same time as item A, even though
they do not have the same preferred time periods. Item C is not delivered at the same time as item A because
the neighborhood distance is exceeded. In this case, it does not make sense to deliver item A and item C
together because the distance between them is too great.

Application Help for S4SCSD


30 PUBLIC Tele Sales
The following figure illustrates the situation described above:

Green Traffic Light


A green traffic light symbol Preferred Period in the Priority <date> column signals the time period preferred by
the trader for this customer as defined in Customizing for Pre-Scheduling by choosing Delivery Time Profiles is
relevant. Here you should make an assignment.

Red Traffic Light


The red traffic light Limit Value Reached in the Limit <date> signals that the maximum order quantity or the
maximum number of sales orders for this time period as set in the master data under Define Interval Limits has
been exceeded. Here you should not make an assignment.

In Customizing, under Set Delivery Zone for Limits, you can specify whether the limits are to apply for the top or
bottom delivery zone.

 Note

The unit of measure relates to the unit of measure set in Customizing, under Define Material Planning Group
Indicator.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 31
 Note

The symbols displayed are to assist you during pre-scheduling. However, you are free to ignore the symbols
and pre-schedule items as you wish.

Display Orders

You can call items by double-clicking an order number field. The system displays all pre-scheduled items on the
Pre-Scheduled Items tab page.

Log

If you choose the icon in the Status column, messages are displayed on the Log tab page.

Activities

Reset Item

To reset an assignment and entry, choose Reset Items.

Vehicle Number

In the upper area, you can select a vehicle in the Vehicle Number column. The vehicle number is saved in table
VBAP. The vehicle number can be accessed by other programs, such as external tour optimization programs.

2.15.1 Pre-Scheduling

Describes how you can perform pre-scheduling.

Context

You are on the Create <order type>: Overview or Change <order type>: Overview screen. Choose Pre-
Scheduling in the area of the items.

Procedure

1. Select an item.

○ To assign the item to a period of time, double-click on a quantity field in the overview.

Application Help for S4SCSD


32 PUBLIC Tele Sales
 Note

If you have entered only one day as the delivery date, the item is automatically assigned to the
Other period. To assign the item to a period of time, double-click on a different quantity field. The
date is modified in the item.

○ To assign the item to a time slot in the Time Slot delivery zone, double-click on a quantity field. This
date is set as the end date in To Date. The current date is set as the start date in Date From. A time
frame comprises at least 2 days.

 Note

You can extend the time slot by double-clicking on a quantity field for a later date.

2. Choose the Back pushbutton.


3. Save data.

2.16 Telephony

Use

This function enables you to display the customer data entered in the system when an incoming call is
received. You can also initiate outbound calls to partners.

Prerequisites

You have installed the hardware and software required for telephony.

To enable the system to register the telephone number, the caller must have a digital telephone connection.

You have configured the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP NetWeaver by choosing Application
Server Basis Services Communication Interfaces SAPphone: Client-Wide Settings Activate Telephony/
Choose Work Center Identification .

You have configured the necessary settings in the master data for transactions SPHA - Extended Settings and
SPHB - SAPphone.

Activities

Inbound

When you receive an inbound call, choose the telephone number of the sold-to party or the telephone number of
the ship-to party on the Create <order type>: Overview screen. The system displays the corresponding
customer data.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 33
Outbound

You can make outbound calls as follows:

● On the Create <order type>: Overview screen for the sold-to party and ship-to party.
● From the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, under SAP
Menu Tele Sales (TS) Notes Process Notes , in the Contact Person group box.

2.17 Multireference

Use

In a sales or purchase document, or a data collation document, this function enables you to reference various
other documents or documents and objects such as service stations, tanks, or maintenance objects. You
create the reference manually, or the system creates it automatically.

This allows you to create references that the system does not display in the document flow.

You can display the reference documents for information purposes.

Depending on your Customizing settings, the system can use the data in these documents to determine prices.

Prerequisites

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary
distribution under:

● General Settings Pricing Multireference


● Tele Sales (TS) General Settings Multireference
● Purchasing Multireference
● Data Collation (DC) Data Collation Documents Multireference

If you use multireference for pricing, you must have activated the pricing routine 450 or a copy of this in your
system, and entered this routine in the relevant conditions in the pricing procedure.

Features

The system automatically creates reference documents in the following processes:

● When you post the document within data collation.


● When dealing with third parties in Tele Sales When you create a sales order or a sales contract, the system
references the purchasing document.

Application Help for S4SCSD


34 PUBLIC Tele Sales
Activities

You can display the references in the system and also enter references manually:

● In the item details section of Tele Sales, choose the Multireference tab page.
● Choose an item in data collation. The Details area is displayed. Choose the Multireference tab page.
● If you use transactions ME21N, ME22N, and ME23N, choose an item and then choose the Multireference tab
page.
● If you use transactions ME21, ME22, and ME23, in the item details section, select Item Additional
Functions Multireference from the menu.

Related Information

Data Collation (DC) [page 125]


Tele Sales [page 9]

2.18 Reference Pricing

Use

You can use reference pricing to perform a differentiated pricing by creating Business Add-Ins that use
additional fields for the pricing.

There are fields for this, in the item detail of Tele Sales on the Item Detail tab page in the Reference Fields group
box. You can enter the values manually or through BAdIs. The values in these fields can then be included in the
pricing.

Prerequisites

To fill the reference fields in the sales order automatically using BAdIs, the following prerequisites must be met.

Customizing

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD), under Tele Sales (TS)
General Settings Reference Pricing , you have configured the following settings.

● Under Set Time for Market Reference Price Checks and Set Time for Market Reference Price Execution,
define BAdIs for checking and execution.
● You first define a procedure under Define Procedure. You then determine the steps and assign BAdIs. The
checking BAdI checks whether a condition has been met. If the condition has been met, the executing BAdI
executes an action. You can define several steps that are executed in succession.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 35
● Under Determine Procedure, you set when a procedure is to apply and how the fields in the item detail are
to be displayed.

● Under Set Field Prepopulation you can set the default values for fields that you use in BAdIs. The fields
must be contained in the BAdI, but you can change the values to be used here.

You have set pricing in line with your requirements in the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide under
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control . The actual evaluation of the reference
fields in the order item now takes place.

Example

Example 1

The order item material should not be relevant for pricing, rather a reference material. So you can, for example,
define a reference material for heating oil and diesel that is relevant for pricing. You can use a BAdI to fill the
reference field Material in the order item.

Example 2

The actual plant delivering as entered in the order item should not be relevant for pricing, rather a higher-level
plant (reference plant). You do not need to enter a price for each plant in the system, but only the reference
plant requires a price. You can also use the corresponding reference fields here.

2.19 Evaluations

Use

Various general evaluations are available for Tele Sales.

You start the evaluations from the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution by
choosing SAP Menu Tele Sales (TS) Evaluations , where the evaluations are located under various
nodes. For example, evaluations related to the equipment data function are located under the Equipment Data
node.

Related Information

Equipment Data [page 23]

Application Help for S4SCSD


36 PUBLIC Tele Sales
2.19.1 Terminal Access ID List

Use

You can use this report to display all contract items with a terminal access identification number for a selected
period.

Activities

Start the report from the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen by
choosing SAP Menu Tele Sales Evaluations Sales Terminal Access ID List per Plant .

2.19.2 Sales Document Overview

This report generates an overview of the sales documents.

Use

The report generates an overview of the sales documents that meet the selection criteria. For the contracts you
can choose whether all or only the open contracts are to be displayed. Open documents are those whose
overall processing status is not yet completed and that have an open remaining quantity (greater than zero).

In the case of contracts and quotations, the validity of the term or binding period is not automatically checked
against the current date. If only open documents that are valid on specific days are to be printed, you need to
restrict the data basis using the corresponding selection criteria.

You can select the currency and the unit of measure to which you want to convert.

These quantities are displayed:

● Total quantity
● Released quantity
● Exceeded quantity
● Quantity left on vehicle

 Note

The report is optimized for the ALV output, therefore, this documentation refers to the ALV output.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 37
Activities

Start the report in the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing S4SCSD Tele Sales (TS) Evaluations Sales
Display Sales Document Overview .

Choose the data, output parameters, and other data. Choose Execute.

Features

Display sales document


Opens the transaction Display Quantity Contract <Number> VA43 for a selected contract.

If the selected sales document category is not G Contract, the corresponding transaction for the sales
document type is opened.

The other pushbuttons are only displayed for the document category Contract:

Document output
Opens a dialog box in which you can change the output parameters. The database is not accessed again.

Sales contract analysis


Opens the program Display Sales Contract for a selected contract.

Quantity transferred
Opens a dialog box if you have selected two contracts with the same material. Select the source document in
the dialog box. Choose Choose. In a further dialog box, enter the quantity to be transferred. Choose Continue.
The quantity is transferred.

2.19.3 Purchasing Document Overview

This report provides an overview of the purchasing documents.

Use

The report generates an overview of the purchasing documents that meet the selection criteria. For the
contracts you can choose whether all or only the open contracts are to be displayed. Open contract items are
those that are still valid, and that have neither a deletion or lock indicator and have an open remaining quantity
(greater than zero).

 Note

The report is optimized for the ALV output, therefore, this documentation refers to the ALV output.

Application Help for S4SCSD


38 PUBLIC Tele Sales
You can select the currency and the unit of measure to which you want to convert.

These quantities are displayed:

● Total quantity
● Delivered quantity
● Order quantity (if the quantity is greater than zero, the field is marked in red in the output)
● Overdelivered quantity

Activities

Start the report in the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing S4SCSD Tele Sales (TS) Evaluations
Purchasing Display Purchasing Document Overview .

Choose the data, output parameters, and other data. Choose Execute.

Output

If a currency translation or unit conversion was not possible, a lightning symbol is displayed. In this case, the
totals are not displayed correctly.

Features

Display purchasing document


Opens the transaction Display Master ContractME33 or Change Master ContractME32 for a selected contract.
You can configure this in the Maintain Master Agreements group box on the initial screen.

If the selected purchasing document category is not K Contract, the corresponding transaction for the
purchasing document type is opened.

Document output
Opens a dialog box in which you can change the output parameters. The database is not accessed again.

The other pushbuttons are only displayed for the purchasing document category K Contract:

Purchasing contract analysis


Opens the program Display Purchase Contract for a selected contract.

Quantity transferred
If you have selected two contracts with the same material, a dialog box appears. Select the source document in
the dialog box. Choose Choose. In a further dialog box, enter the quantity to be transferred. Choose Continue.
The quantity is transferred.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 39
2.20 Collective Order

Enables a customer to order materials at the retailer for themselves and others.

Use

A customer orders materials for both themselves and for other customers in the neighborhood. In this way, the
customer can take advantage of better conditions, for example.

This results in the following advantages for you:

● More efficient use of means of transport


● Additional scope for pricing due to lower shipment costs
● Encouraging the customer to be loyal to your company

The group customer customers are clearly mapped in a customer hierarchy, and can be assigned to the
following customer types:

● Responsible
● Deputy
● Regular customer

Prerequisites

In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Tele Sales (TS) Collective Order , you have made the settings.

You have created a customer hierarchy for the collective order.

Related Information

Creating a Collective Order [page 42]


Customer Hierarchy Collective Order [page 41]

Application Help for S4SCSD


40 PUBLIC Tele Sales
2.20.1 Customer Hierarchy Collective Order

Maps the customers for the collective order in a hierarchy.

Use

In the collective order, you need a customer hierarchy that contains the group customer customer.

Prerequisites

On the SAP Easy Access screen, under S4SCSD Tele Sales (TS) Master Data Customer Hierarchy
Create Customer Hierarchy Type , you must have created a customer hierarchy type of the group Collective
Order.

Conversion

If you have already used the customer hierarchy in Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD), you can continue
to use the data in S4SCSD. To do this, you need to use a report to convert the data. The report is located in
Customizing for S4SCSD, under Technical Objects Migration Convert Customer Hierarchy .

You can run this report as a test run initially. In doing so, no data is converted. After the conversion run has
been performed, the converted objects are displayed.

 Caution

No objects may exist in the customer hierarchy of S4SCSD. If objects already exist, you must delete these
objects first.

2.20.1.1 Creating a Customer Hierarchy

Describes how you create a hierarchical structure for the collective order and assign customers.

Prerequisites

You must have defined a customer hierarchy type. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose S4SCSD Tele
Sales (TS) Master Data Customer Hierarchy Create Customer Hierarchy Type . Create a hierarchy type
of the group Collective Order.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 41
Context

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose S4SCSD Tele Sales Master Data Customer Hierarchy
Edit Customer Hierarchy . The Customer Hierarchy dialog box appears.
You can use the Selection of Group IDs tab to search for existing customer hierarchies.
2. Enter a customer hierarchy type and the organizational data. Choose Find.
3. Choose Edit. In the hierarchy structure choose Create New Group. The Create New Group dialog box
appears.

If the hierarchy structure is not displayed, choose Hierarchy Structure.


4. Enter a node text. Choose the OK pushbutton. Save data.
You can assign additional lower-level nodes to a group. Select a node. Choose Add Node.
5. In the customer list, choose Find Customers. The Find Customers dialog box appears.
6. Enter the search criteria. Choose Find.
7. Select the customer or customers to be assigned in the Customer List. Select an end node in the Hierarchy
Structure. Choose Add Customer in the Customer List.
8. The customers added to the node are displayed under Hierarchy List.
9. Save data.

2.20.2 Creating a Collective Order

Describes how to create a collective order in Tele Sales.

Procedure

1. Start the transaction Collective Order on the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing S4SCSD Tele Sales
(TS) . The Group Customer: Initial Screen appears. Enter the data. Choose Continue.
2. Choose Find in the Header Data group box. The Find Using Customer No. or Node Text dialog box appears.
3. Find a customer or a node. Choose Continue.
4. Double-click a node symbol. The customers are transferred to the overview. The system displays the
current status of the credit limit.
5. Copy the customer data to an item on the Order Data tab page by double-clicking a customer symbol.
Copy all customers to the item on the Order Data tab page by double-clicking the node symbol.
6. Enter the required data in the General Data group box. Choose Continue.

Application Help for S4SCSD


42 PUBLIC Tele Sales
7. Copy the data to the items. You have the following options:
a. All data should be transferred to all of the items on the Order Data tab page: Choose the All Data to All
Items pushbutton on the far right of the General Data group box.
b. All data is to be copied to the selected items: Select the items on the Order Data tab page. On the far
right of the General Data group box, choose the All Data to Sel. Items pushbutton.
c. The order quantity is to be distributed evenly among all the customers: On the left of the General Data
group box, choose Distribute Quantity to All Items.

You can transfer the general data to the items flexibly.

You can create two types of text on the Texts tab page. You can create a long text for the data collation
document on the Order Texts tab page. You can create texts for notes on the Note Text tab page. You
can choose whether the text is to be printed on the delivery note or invoice, or on both documents. The
note text is displayed in Tele Sales.
8. Choose Verify. The system checks whether all mandatory fields have been filled. Errors are displayed on
the Status tab page.
9. Choose Post. The order data is posted. The Status tab page displays the order numbers and the posting
texts, as well as the updated status of the credit limit.

To see the data collation document, choose Report. In the Detail Data on the Long Texts tab page, you can
see the long text you created.

To view the sales document in Tele Sales, click the sales document number.

Results

The system creates an order for each customer.

Related Information

Notes [page 9]
Tele Sales [page 9]
Data Collation (DC) [page 125]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Tele Sales PUBLIC 43
3 Continuous Product Replenishment
(CPR)

Purpose

You can use this process to provide your customers with a steady supply of products based on their
requirements by continuously calculating and monitoring the expected material consumption. The following
characteristics are included in the standard system:

● Integration of SAP IS-OIL storage objects


● Complete integration of the CPR master data into the business partner data with the role of Customer
● Weather-independent consumption definitions
● Additional delivery options
● Detailed logs

You can use this process to determine the next delivery dates to your customers for heating oil or gas by
forecasting the consumption of oil and gas using degree days based on average annual consumptions or a fixed
cycle.

You base your forecast on:

● Statistical degree day coefficients from weather stations and regions


● Previous consumption data of the customer

The analysis project defines the algorithm for calculating a forecast result and thus the mathematical model.

You can use your own algorithms via a standard interface by making settings in Customizing.

You can determine forecast processes that the system executes after you have performed the analyses. The
standard system includes:

● Generation of e-mails
● Creation of sales orders
● Creation of notes

These forecast processes enable you to react quickly without having to wait for the incoming orders from your
customers. With the support CPR provides for order generation and sales promotions, you can react more
quickly and precisely to the customer's needs, thus increasing customer retention.

You can also generate forecasts for mid-term and long-term requirements for material purchasing quantities.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, you have made the settings under
Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR).

In Customizing, you have made the settings for the projects under Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
Number Ranges .

Application Help for S4SCSD


44 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
From the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, you have made the
required settings under SAP Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Master Data .

From the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, you have created
corresponding customer hierarchy types and customer hierarchies under SAP Menu Continuous Product
Replenishment (CPR) Master Data Customer Hierarchy .

You have entered the required data in the master data for the business partner, under CPR Data.

Process Flow

1. You create a customer hierarchy.


2. You create projects and assign customer hierarchies and, where necessary, processes to them.
3. You define an analysis horizon and conduct the analysis.
4. Start the defined processes with the results of the analysis.

Related Information

CPR Customer Hierarchy [page 45]


Notes [page 9]
Conducting an Analysis [page 47]

3.1 CPR Customer Hierarchy

Maps the customers for the collective order in a hierarchy.

Use

In Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR), you need a customer hierarchy that contains the CPR
customers.

Prerequisites

You have created a customer hierarchy type in the SAP Easy Access screen, under S4SCSD Continuous
Product Replenishment (CPR) Master Data Customer Hierarchy Create Customer Hierarchy Type .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 45
 Note

To select customers in projects for CPR analyses, you create customer hierarchies with a customer
hierarchy type from the CPR Analysis group.

Conversion

If you have already used the customer hierarchy in Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD), you can continue
to use the data in S4SCSD. To do this, you need to use a report to convert the data. The report is located in
Customizing for S4SCSD, under Technical Objects Migration Convert Customer Hierarchy .

You can run this report as a test run initially. In doing so, no data is converted. After the conversion run has
been performed, the converted objects are displayed.

 Caution

No objects may exist in the customer hierarchy of S4SCSD. If objects already exist, you must delete these
objects first.

Related Information

Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) [page 44]

3.1.1 Creating a Customer Hierarchy

Describes how you create a hierarchical structure for CPR and assign customers.

Prerequisites

You must have defined a customer hierarchy type. To do this, in the S4SCSD menu, choose Continuous
Product Replenishment (CPR) Master Data Customer Hierarchy Create Customer Hierarchy . Create a
hierarchy type for the group CPR Analysis.

Context

Application Help for S4SCSD


46 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Master Data
Customer Hierarchy Edit Customer Hierarchy . The Customer Hierarchy dialog box appears.
You can use the Selection of Group IDs tab only to search for existing customer hierarchies.
2. Enter a customer hierarchy type and the organizational data. Choose Find.
3. Choose Edit. In the hierarchy structure choose Create New Group. The Create New Group dialog box
appears.
4. Enter a node text. Choose the OK pushbutton. Save data.
You can assign additional lower-level nodes to a group. Select a node and choose Add Node.
5. In the customer list, choose Find Customers. The Find Customers dialog box appears.
6. Enter the search criteria. Choose Find.
7. Select the customer or customers to be assigned in the Customer List. Select an end node in the Hierarchy
Structure. Choose Add Customer in the Customer List.
8. The customers added to the node are displayed under Hierarchy List. If storage objects are assigned to a
customer, the storage objects for a selected ship-to party are displayed under Storage Objects. For this,
you must have activated the application for IS-OIL. You can activate or deactivate the storage objects for
the CPR analysis.
9. Save data.

3.2 Conducting an Analysis

Describes how to perform an analysis of your projects to start a delivery to your customers.

Context

You analyze projects daily, thereby filtering out the storage objects that require new deliveries within the
analysis horizon.

For projects containing customers with fixed delivery contracts, orders can be generated automatically,
including e-mails with shipping notifications if necessary.

For projects that contain customers without fixed delivery contracts, generate notes for your tele sales
employees.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 47
Procedure

1. Start the analysis in the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing S4SCSD Continuous Product
Replenishment (CPR) Continuous Product Replenishment . The Continuous Product Replenishment
(CPR) screen appears.
2. Create a project. To do this, choose the New Project pushbutton. In the General group box, enter a project
name, choose a segment ID, and select a customer hierarchy from the Selection tab page. On the
Processes tab page you can also create processes, for example, the generation of a note. The processes
available for selection depend on the algorithm that is assigned to the segment ID.
3. Choose Save. The created project is now displayed in the navigation tree.
4. Select Conduct Analysis from the context menu of the project that you created.
5. You can view the result on the Results List tab page.
6. Choose Save Result and Log. The <System Name> Name of Results List dialog box appears.

Change the proposed name if necessary and choose Continue.

The system inserts the symbols for the results list and for the log as subnodes in the structure.
7. In the context menu of the results list, choose Release Results List.

The system inserts the symbols for the processes defined in the project as subnodes.
8. Choose Start Process from the context menu of the required process.

The process takes place for all result lines that are not locked. Processing messages are displayed on the
Log tab page.

Related Information

CPR Customer Hierarchy [page 45]

3.3 Defining Default Groups

Use

This function allows you to define fixed values that are to be transferred to the order database during the CPR
order generation process, for example, the sales organization and sales document type. You assign a default
group to each CPR storage object in transaction BP in the BP role Customer, under CPR Data Additional
Doc. Values Default Group .

Application Help for S4SCSD


48 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
Prerequisites

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, under Continuous Product
Replenishment (CPR) Define Required Entry Fields for Default Groups , if desired you have determined which
table fields are definitely to be filled for the CPR order generation.

Example

In Customizing, define the following:

● Table VBAK-VKORG, BAPISDHD1 Sales Organization


● Table VBAK-AUART, BAPISDHD1 Sales Document Type

● For default group VKORG1:


○ VBAK-VKORG, BAPISDHD1 Sales Organization: ORG1
○ VBAK-AUART, BAPISDHD1 Sales Document Type: OTA
○ VBAK-VTWEG, BAPISDHD1 Distribution Channel: G3

In the master data under Define Default Groups, define the following settings:

● For default group VKORG2:


○ VBAK-VKORG, BAPISDHD1 Sales Organization: ORG2
○ VBAK-AUART, BAPISDHD1 Sales Document Type: OTA
○ VBAK-VTWEG, BAPISDHD1 Distribution Channel: G4

● Make the following assignments:


○ All ORG1 storage objects to default group VKORG1
○ All ORG2 storage objects to default group VKORG2

Result:

● All CPR orders for the storage objects of sales organization ORG1 receive the values for ORG1/OTA/G3.
● All CPR orders for the storage objects of sales organization ORG2 receive the values for ORG2/OTA/G4.

3.4 Analyzing the Logs

Use

This report allows you to search for messages that were output in CPR as SOC logs or process logs. You can
search for warnings, errors, or both.

All messages found are displayed in a log. From here, you can display the individual messages and access the
individual logs and customer master data.

Analyses of very large data volumes should be run overnight.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 49
Activities

This report is located in SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, under
SAP Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Tools Analyze CPR Logs .

More Information

For more information, see the report documentation.

3.5 Edit Stocks

Use

You can use this function to enter stock data for IS-OIL storage objects that are monitored using CPR. You can
only those change stock types that can be changed manually according to your Customizing settings, for
example:

● Physical Dipping (1)


● Stock Specification After External Delivery (2)
● Informational Stock Specification (5)

Other stock types cannot be entered manually, for example:

● CPR Result from Weather Data - Logical Dipping (3)


● CPR Result from Weather Forecast (4)
● Open CPR Order - Planned Delivery Quantity (6)
● Delivered CPR Order – Actual Delivery Quantity (7)

The number in parentheses specifies the type of stock determination in the Type of Determination field of the
table.

Of all the stock determination types that can be entered, only Physical Dipping can be used as a reliable
reference stock for the Consumption algorithm of the CPR analysis.

From every last analysis, the analysis saves the calculated dip using the stock type CPR Result from Weather
Data - Logical Dipping and the forecasted dips using the stock type CPR Result from Weather Forecast.

The data from all of the stock determination types, with the exception of CPR Result from Weather Data -
Logical Dipping, is deleted by the Delete Stocks report after the lifetime that is defined in Customizing expires.

Application Help for S4SCSD


50 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
Activities

You access this function from the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, by
choosing SAP Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Edit Stocks , and via the Business
Partner transaction under CPR Data on the Stocks tab page.

On the Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) screen, in the menu under Goto, the stocks are displayed
only.

Related Information

Delete Stocks [page 51]

3.6 Delete Stocks

Use

You can use this report to delete the following stock data for IS-OIL storage objects that are monitored using
CPR:

● Physical Dipping
● Stock Specification After External Delivery
● Informational Stock Specification
● CPR Result from Weather Forecast
● Open CPR Order - Planned Delivery Quantity
● Delivered CPR Order - Actual Delivery Quantity

The data of the individual stock determination types is only displayed for deletion after the corresponding
lifetime defined in Customizing under Define Stock Types has expired.

The report can also be executed as a job.

Activities

You access this report from SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, via SAP
Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) and the Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) screen
in the menu under Goto.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 51
More Information

For more information, see the report documentation.

3.7 Display Change Documents

Use

You can use this report to display a log of entries that you made manually with the transaction to create,
change, and delete customer master data.

The display incorporates the CPR parameters for the following table names:

● OIISOCIKN Storage Objects of Ship-To Parties


● OIISOCTSM Time-Dependent Assignments of Material to Storage Object
● /ICO/MO_SOCMETH Time-Dependent Assignments of Methods to Storage Object
● /ICO/MO_PR_MUSG Time-Dependent Assignments of Usage Types to Storage Object
● /ICO/MO_PR_CFTH Dip
● /ICO/MO_PR_SCPKN Site Control Parameters of Ship-To Parties
● /ICO/MO_PR_CHRCT Characteristics of Storage Objects

The change document object for the customer master data is DEBI and the object type is the customer
number.

You can also evaluate the table names selectively.

Activities

You access this report from SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, via SAP
Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) and the Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) screen
in the menu under Goto.

More Information

For more information, see the report documentation.

Application Help for S4SCSD


52 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
3.8 Process Job Variants

Use

You can use this report to set up the execution of analyses using a job.

Activities

Start the report from the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, by
choosing SAP Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Process Job Variants .

Access the defined projects using the project ID or project name and, if applicable, select the Start Processes
checkbox to start the processes immediately.

Either choose Goto Variants Save as Variant , enter a Variant Name and Description for the variant, and
then save your entries or choose Execute to process the job immediately.

You can then use transaction SM36 to schedule the created variant as a job.

In this transaction, you can choose Execute to perform an analysis immediately. If you are using parallel
processing, the job will run for immediate execution according to the definitions set for the foreground.

You can select and display the created logs on the Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) screen.

More Information

For more information, see the report documentation.

Related Information

Parallel Processing [page 55]

3.9 Delete Objects

Use

You can use this report to delete multiple CPR objects (for example, projects, result lists, and logs)
simultaneously. In the actual application, you can always only delete one object using the corresponding
context menu.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 53
Activities

1. Start the report from the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen,
by choosing SAP Menu Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Delete Objects .

2. Enter the selection data and choose .


3. Select the objects to be deleted in the Selection column.

4. Choose .

More Information

For more information, see the report documentation.

3.10 Cyclical Delivery

Use

This function enables the regular delivery of CPR storage objects based on calendar rules.

The Annual, Monthly, and Weekly calendar methods determine the next planned delivery time according to the
general calendar defined and without the inclusion of public holidays.

The consumption-oriented Daily method determines the next planned delivery time according to the number
of consumption days, not calendar days, that have passed since the last planned delivery time, taking into
account the consumption days defined in the factory calendar. The factory calendar is also defined in the
storage object. The method also allows a graduated time scale for multiple deliveries on the same day.

The actual delivery dates always coincide with the delivery times defined in the storage object. However, the
next deliveries are always based on the planned delivery times.

Prerequisites

You have defined a factory calendar.

If you want to calculate only weekdays as consumption days for the storage objects with the Daily method,
enter only these as work days. If you want to calculate all calendar days, enter the weekend days as work days
as well.

In the Business Partner BP transaction, you have selected the customer with the Customer BP role. Under
CPR Data Control Data , you have entered a factory calendar in the Location Calendar field.

Application Help for S4SCSD


54 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
Activities

Define Storage Object for Cyclical Delivery

You are in the master data administration area for customers.

For the calendar-oriented "Weekly" method

1. Choose CPR Data.


2. In the Storage Object group box, select Storage Objects. Select a storage object.
3. Choose the Methods tab. Enter the data for the Weekly method and press the ENTER key. The Create
Forecasting Method dialog box appears.
4. Enter the data and choose Continue.
5. Save your data.

For the consumption-oriented "Daily" method

1. Choose CPR Data.


2. In the Storage Object group box, select a storage object.
3. Choose the Methods tab. Enter the data for the Daily method and press the ENTER key. The Create
Forecasting Method dialog box appears.
4. Enter the value for the day frequency and choose Expand Fields. More fields are displayed.
5. Enter data for the other fields and choose Continue.
6. Save your data.

Conducting an Analysis

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen under SAP Menu
Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) Start Continuous Product Replenishment , define a project
with a segment that you have assigned to the algorithm OTAS_FCR.
2. On the Selection tab, select a customer that has an open order for one of its storage objects.
3. Perform the analysis.

3.11 Parallel Processing

Use

Data can be processed in parallel. This allows the system load to be distributed equally.

From a technical perspective, this is performed by the administration department.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) PUBLIC 55
Prerequisites

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution, you need to make the settings under
Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR) General Configure Control of Parallel Processing .

Application Help for S4SCSD


56 PUBLIC Continuous Product Replenishment (CPR)
4 Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)

Use

This component provides interfaces and functions for automating the business transactions in retail networks
whose main business is selling fuel to consumers. This includes the administration of retail networks and the
reconciliation and settlement of the business transactions for a location.

Integration

The master data from IS-OIL-DS-MRN is still in use.

The following figure outlines the correlations in RFNO:

Features

● Master Data Maintenance


● Inbound Data Processing

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 57
● RFNO Document with Processing of Documents
● Payment Card Management
● Business Transaction Determination
● Monitoring Using the Network Operations Desk (NODe)
● Reporting Using Network Operations Reporting (NORe)
● Archiving of RFNO PAT Documents and Payment Cards
● Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR)

Related Information

Master Data Maintenance [page 62]


Inbound Data Processing [page 70]
Business Transaction Determination [page 71]
RFNO document [page 79]
Processing Documents [page 82]
Payment Card Management [page 86]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Network Operations Reporting (NORe) [page 102]
Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]
Archiving DC Documents with /PAT/DOCS [page 233]

4.1 Assigning Partners

Use

You assign the partners to the partner object with a validity period. The assignment can be ended, deactivated,
or replaced by other assignments. You can create partner assignments in more than one place in the system.

 Note

You can deactivate the created partner assignments in NODe, or restrict their validity period. They may also
be changed by other new assignments to the same partner object.

 Note

In RFNO documents, the partners that are relevant for the sales volume period of the document are
transferred from the permanent assignments. Here you can change or delete the partner information, or
add new partners. These changes are not saved permanently for the partner object and apply only for this
document.

Application Help for S4SCSD


58 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Prerequisites

You use the roles and profiles in Customizing or create your own profiles with the available roles and assign
them accordingly. You define the behavior of the role in the role profile

Process Flow

Assigning Partners

Menu

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Partners Assign Partners . The Assign
Partners: Step 1 (Select Object) screen appears.
2. Choose an RFNO object ID. Additional fields are displayed depending on the ID. Enter the data and choose
Continue. Step 2 Select Role appears.
3. Choose a partner role. Role profiles that belong to the object are displayed in the Role Profile group box.
Choose Continue. Step 3 Select Partner appears.

 Note

If the assignment is called in NODe or transaction BP, the information on the partner key is transferred.
The process then starts with step 1; step 2 is skipped. However, you can change the data in step 2.

4. Enter the data and choose Continue. Step 4 Validity appears.


5. Enter the validity data and choose Verify. If no errors have occurred, choose Save, where offered.

 Note

You cannot delete partner assignments. An active assignment can be deactivated. If the role can only be
filled once, it will be deactivated if overlaps occur with assignments already active and, if necessary, new
assignments with modified validity will be created. Active partner assignments can only be adjusted by
deactivating the existing assignment and adding the same partner again.

Launchpad

1. In the launchpad, under Business Partners and Partner Roles, choose the entry Create Partner Assignment.
The Assign Partners transaction appears.
2. Continue with point 2, as described under Menu.

Network Operations Desk (NODe)

You can only use this function if you have used the Personal Toolbox to add the pushbutton.

In the corresponding views in the Network Operations Desk (NODe), the detail view Partner List is displayed
with the link Add Partner Role. The Assign Partners transaction appears. Certain parameters are already
displayed, such as information on the current partner object. Corresponding steps are skipped if required in
the transaction Assign Partners.

Continue with point 3, as described under Menu. Point 2 is not applicable. However, you can select step 1 to
change data as required.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 59
 Note

You must be in Edit mode.

Creating Payment Cards and Payment Card Contracts

In the transactions Create Payment Card and Create Payment Card Contract, the partner-object-independent
steps of the partner assignment are called. To fulfill the role profile for a new payment card or a new payment
card contract, these steps can be performed as often as is required to fulfill the role profile definition. The role
profile definition must be fulfilled before the payment card contract or the payment card can be released.

Step 1 is not applicable. Proceed as described under Menu.

Business Partners

In the Business Partner transaction, a function for assigning a partner object to a partner is implemented for
relevant role views.

The further process is as described under Menu.

Related Information

Creating and Deleting a Payment Card [page 89]


Role Concept [page 62]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Personal Toolbox [page 104]

4.2 Messages

Use

The messages from the S4SCSD log that refer to the displayed RFNO object are displayed in the log display.
Temporary messages that are determined for the current status of the RFNO object are also displayed.

The log display is possible for the following RFNO objects:

● Locations, location/business type


● Payment cards
● Payment card contracts
● Payment card profile

The Customizing settings for the RFNO object determine which messages are displayed. The status profile and
log profile are particularly important. The time period for which the messages are displayed depends on the
period displayed in the UIBB calendar. However, the final decision depends on the methods RN201 and RN210
for the RFNO event.

Application Help for S4SCSD


60 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The messages are displayed in the following processes:

● In the Network Operations Desk (NODe)


● In document processing
○ Edit location document
○ Edit clearing house document
○ Edit payment card contract document

Calendar

The previous and current month are displayed. In the calendar, days for which messages exist are displayed in
different colors.

● Red: Error messages exist


● Yellow: Warnings exist
● Green: Information is available
● Gray: No messages exist

To display any existing messages in the log structure, click a day. To remove the messages again from the log
structure, click the day again.

The messages from the S4SCSD log that refer to the displayed RFNO object (a location, for example) appear in
the log display. Temporary messages that are determined for the current status of the RFNO object are also
displayed.

Log Structure

The objects from the day that you have selected in the calendar are displayed here. Select an entry to display
the message in the Log Messages group box.

Log Messages

Any messages that exist for the object selected in the Log Structure group box are displayed here. The
respective number of message types is displayed using symbols. By clicking a message group, you can exclude
it from the display.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for RFNO, under General Settings Edit Log Messages , configure which messages are
relevant. If an error occurs, you can use the messages to analyze the business transaction determination
process.

Related Information

Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]


Processing Documents [page 82]
Business Transaction Determination [page 71]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 61
4.3 Master Data Maintenance

A variety of master data in the areas IS-Oil, SAP general, and RFNO must exist for RFNO.

In RFNO, you need to create the objects for a service station, for example, partner, roles, payment cards, and
payment card contracts. There are relationships between these objects, for example, a partner relationship
between a location and RFNO partners, which you need to define.

In component IS-OIL-DS-MRN, you need to maintain and manage the retail networks.

In general SAP Customizing, you need to define the business partners, for example.

The master data is integrated into the Network Operations Desk (NODe) for viewing and monitoring purposes.

Related Information

Payment Card Management [page 86]


Role Concept [page 62]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Creating Payment Card Contracts [page 88]

4.3.1 Role Concept

Describes the role concept in RFNO.

RFNO Objects

Partner relationships are used to link RFNO partner objects, for example, a location with RFNO partners, for a
period of time, by assigning a defined relationship type: the RFNO role. The roles are predefined and control the
behavior of the application across RFNO. You can use the roles to create role profiles.

All RFNO objects are described in a cross-client table in Customizing for RFNO, under General Settings
Define RFNO Objects . The objects are assigned to object types. To fulfill the properties of an object type, the
service class needs to implement certain interfaces.

The following table provides an overview of the delivered object types with the RFNO objects and the possible
roles:

Object Type RFNO Object RFNO Role

Partner objects Location Dealer

Application Help for S4SCSD


62 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Object Type RFNO Object RFNO Role

Location manager

Service station owner

Sales volume participant

Point of delivery

Vendor

Payment card Driver

Payment card owner

Payment card payer

Payment card co-user

Vehicle

Payment card ID Clearing house

Payment card issuer

Network operator

Payment card contract Payment card contract payer

Partner Business partner None

Settlement account Customer None

Vendor None

Not specified Material None

Meter None

Tank None

 Note

You can define additional master data. Developer knowledge is required for this.

For the settings for the objects, see Customizing for S4SCSD, under RFNO General Settings Define
RFNO Objects .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 63
RFNO Roles

The RFNO roles are described in a cross-client system table and cannot be changed. A role is permanently
assigned to a partner object. The properties of a role determine its behavior in the partner application. Some
properties can be overridden when compiling role profiles:

● Role is a required entry


The role profile check reports an error if there is no partner relationship for this role for the review period.
The indicator can be activated, but not deactivated.
● Multiple role
The role check allows multiple partner relationships, even in the same period. The indicator can be
deactivated, but not activated.
● Role is relevant for settlement
The indicator activates the Settlement tab page in the Business Partner transaction. It is not possible to
override the indicator.

You can view the RFNO roles in Customizing for S4SCSD, under RFNO Partner Roles Display Partner
Roles .

RFNO Role Profile

In Customizing for RFNO, under Partner Roles Define Partner Role Profiles , you can use the roles defined
for a partner object to compile role profiles.

A role profile defines which roles are permitted for the assigned partner object in this profile. The role is
assigned an RFNO object with the property "partner" and possible default settings for the role are overwritten.

 Example

A customer issues two custom fleet cards. One for haulage companies who want to assign their vehicles
and drivers to the card, and one for individual customers for whom partner cards are also to be issued and
settled jointly.

A role profile is assigned to one partner object. A role profile can be assigned two methods.

● Method: Check Profile


This method can be called in various situations and at a defined point in time checks whether all of the
profile's roles are fulfilled for a partner object. The method thereby defines which partner relationships
need to exist for the role profile to be fulfilled. The profile check can be used to determine the status of an
object, or in the incompleteness control (ICC) to determine whether a document can be posted usefully.
● Method: Check Partner
This method decides whether an individual partner relationship that is being added is valid. This allows the
customer to define conditions (beyond the standard checks) that need to be fulfilled for a partner in a role
to be able to be added to the object.

If properties for RFNO objects are configured in Customizing, the defined role profiles can be assigned there.

For the settings for the RFNO role profiles, see Customizing for S4SCSD, under RFNO Partner Roles
Define Partner Role Profiles .

Application Help for S4SCSD


64 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Validity

The validity determines the period for which a partner relationship is valid. The validity period is used by the
settlement documents to determine the valid partners for a particular settlement period. More than one
connection must not be active in a period in roles that do not have the Multiple Role indicator.

The Check function performs this check and other standard checks. If no period has been specified, the
function sets the period Today 00:00:00 until 12/31/9999 23:59:59.

The following applies to roles that are not multiple roles: If an active partner relationship already exists for this
period, it is changed and its validity period ends one second before the new connection becomes valid. To
document this process, a copy of the old connection is created and stored as an inactive connection.

Related Information

Integration in Business Partner (BP) [page 65]

4.3.2 Integration in Business Partner (BP)

Describes the integration of RFNO into the Business Partner transaction (BP).

Use

RFNO uses the SAP Business Partner for the central management of the partners to be displayed in the RFNO
environment. In transaction BP, it is possible to maintain and display all business partners uniformly.

For this purpose, RFNO has implemented an enhancement for transaction BP, which addresses the special
requirements of RFNO and which you can supplement. Corresponding BP roles in which you can enter
properties for the roles have been implemented for the RFNO roles.

For example, you can configure business partners as relevant for settlement.

The following table provides an overview of the business partner roles:

Business Partner Role BP Role Title RFNO Role Role Name Properties

RNS001 Owner FS_OWNER Service station owner ● Geographical co­


ordinates
RNS002 Dealer FS_DEALE Dealer ● List of assigned
locations
RNS003 Sales volume partici­ FS_SALES Sales volume partici­
● Settlement Rele­
pant pant
vance

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 65
Business Partner Role BP Role Title RFNO Role Role Name Properties

RNS004 Point of delivery FS_SUPPL Point of delivery ● Geographical co­


ordinates

RNS005 Manager FS_OPERA Location manager ● Geographical co­


ordinates
RNS006 Vendor FS_VENDO Vendor ● List of assigned
locations
● Settlement Rele­
vance

RNS007 CSR customer FS_CSRCU CSR customer None

RNS008 Inventory manager FS_STOCK Inventory manager None

RNC001 Card payer FC_PAYER Payment card payer ● Geographical co­


ordinates
● List of assigned
payment cards
and payment card
contracts
● Settlement Rele­
vance

RNC002 Card owner FC_OWNER Payment card owner ● Geographical co­


ordinates
RNC003 Card user FC_USER Payment card co-user ● List of assigned
payment cards

RNC004 Driver FC_DRIVE Driver ● Geographical co­


ordinates
● Fields for driver's
license and au­
thorizations
● List of assigned
payment cards
and payment card
contracts

RNP001 Clearing house PC_CLEAR Clearing house ● Geographical co­


ordinates
● List of payment
cards
● Settlement Rele­
vance

Application Help for S4SCSD


66 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Business Partner Role BP Role Title RFNO Role Role Name Properties

RNP002 Issuer PC_ISSUE Payment card issuer ● Geographical co­


ordinates
● List of payment
cards

RNP003 Network operator PC_NWOP Network operator ● Geographical co­


ordinates
● Client number
● Method of send­
ing for acceptance
lists

Related Information

Configuring Business Partners As Relevant for Settlement [page 67]

4.3.2.1 Configuring Business Partners As Relevant for


Settlement

Use

Business partners (BP) via whom settlement is performed, for example, dealers and sales volume participants,
are relevant for settlement. This can be the actual BP, or any other business partner managed in the system
with a role via which the object relevant for settlement, for example, Customer, can be found; as well as the
method that is used to access the settlement account.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 67
The following figure illustrates the scenario:

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Partners Edit Business Partner . The
Edit Business Partner screen appears.
2. Find the business partner and select the role.
3. Select the Settlement tab page.
4. Enter the required data in the Settlement group box.
If required, you can enter a different BP, its role, and a method that determines the settlement account.
This BP then receives the settlement. A method can determine a customer account and the organizational
data, for example. The method is called in the relevant part of the settlement process to determine the
correct partner for settlement.

 Note

● It is only possible to insert and make changes up to the valid-to date in the Partner for Settlement group
box.
● Deletion is not possible so as to allow retroactive settlements or corrections.
● Missing entries in the fields Date To and Time Until are supplemented with the values 12/31/9999 and
23:59:59. A warning is displayed.
● An entry is required in field BPartner.
● The validity periods must not overlap. However, gaps are allowed.

Application Help for S4SCSD


68 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.3.3 Consistency Check for RFNO Locations

You can use this report to check the consistency of your RFNO locations. This involves performing checks that
are not carried out in the standard SAP system.

Use

You can find the report in the SAP menu under S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master
Data Locations Check Consistency of Locations .

Activities

In the Search Criteria area, select the locations based on their location ID. To refine the search, you can select a
period.

In the Results Display area, select how the results display is to be structured:

● Location/Business Type/Material
● Material/Business Type/Location

If you want to see all messages, select Display All.

In the results, select a level and choose Execute Transaction. When selecting location or business type, you are
taken to the Change Location(O402)transaction. When selecting the material, you are taken to theChange
Material (MM02)transaction.

Checks

● Whether the storage object at the location is split due to partial assignment
● Whether the time validity of the meter lies outside the time validity of the tank
● Whether the material is assigned using the meter
● Whether the material in the tank differs from the material at the location
● Whether the material is not assigned to the location
● Whether the tank at the location is assigned without a separate material
● Comparison between the storage locations at the location and the storage locations at the tank

Output

The results are displayed in a structure.

In the Details area, a table contains the details on the locations found.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 69
In the Messages area, the messages are displayed for a level selected in the results structure.

4.4 Inbound Data Processing

Use

This process checks and converts the inbound data, and determines which additional steps need to be
executed.

Prerequisites

You need to have configured valuation at plant level in Customizing.

Process

RFNO uses its own, uniform, data format to transfer POS data from the locations. POS data that is to be
processed by RFNO through the point of sale systems at the locations, the forecourt systems at the location, or
the network operator, needs to be transferred to the IDoc data format.

After the external data has been checked and, where necessary, supplemented, and converted into internal
data, the business transaction determination takes place. The data is used to determine which business
transactions exist. The application uses this to determine how the document is to be updated and which RFNO
documents are generated. Documents are updated using the report Update Documents. This report is located
in the SAP Menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Document Processing .

The RFNO documents are used to analyze, reconcile, evaluate, and settle the business transactions for a
location. The Process Automation Toolset (PAT) framework also offers an extensive process control, which can
be used to post the required follow-on documents to the SAP modules, for example, MM and SD. The reports
for document posting and Network Operations Reporting (NORe) update and post the RFNO documents.

Application Help for S4SCSD


70 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The following figure illustrates the process of inbound data processing described above:

Related Information

RFNO document [page 79]


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) [page 162]
Network Operations Reporting (NORe) [page 102]
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM) [page 72]

4.4.1 Business Transaction Determination

Use

Business transaction determination is a process within RFNO inbound data processing.

Prerequisites

You have identified all business transactions that occur at your locations and have defined the criteria required
for the determination.

You configure the criteria in Customizing for RFNO, under General Settings Configure Field Catalogs ,
determination group ID PID Business Transaction Determination.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 71
You define the aggregation class in Customizing for RFNO, under Document Control Define Document
Update .

You define the business transactions in Customizing for RFNO, under Document Control Define Business
Transactions . If a business transaction changes at a certain point in time, create a new version for the
business transaction ID and configure this new version.

Process

POS data that exists in the internal RFNO data format represents the smallest document unit of the processes
at a location. For example, these are cash documents or a reading from technical devices, for example, a fuel
pump. To transfer these documents to an overall document for reconciliation of a location, the business
transaction defined by the POS data, for example, the sale of diesel as a cash payment or a meter reading at
the end of the day, needs to be determined.

The reports for analyzing a business transaction and updating a document, which you can also run in the
background, analyze the checked POS data in RFNO data format according to criteria to be defined, and
determine the business transaction. The business transaction and the resulting actions for the document
update are recorded in the table /ICO/RN_IF_POSTR. If it is not possible to determine the business
transaction uniquely, this is written to the table /ICO/RN_IF_POSER. You can view the status of the data in the
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM).

Related Information

Processing Documents [page 82]


Inbound Data Processing [page 70]
Interface Monitor [page 159]
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM) [page 72]

4.4.2 RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM)

Displays data records generated in RFNO inbound data processing. For data records with errors, you can
correct the causes of the errors.

Use

Inbound data processing writes incorrect data to table /ICO/RN_IF_POSER. Up to three messages are stored
in the message groups MSGE1 to MSGE3 for each data record. After the correction, the data is written to
table /ICO/RN_IF_POSTR.

Application Help for S4SCSD


72 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
In RIM, you can search for, view, and process certain inbound data or messages. You can then change the
incorrect data records. You can also restart the postprocessing of the data for the inbound data processing.
The direct change is made exclusively in the memory, while the mass change is made by updating the
database.

To prevent multiple applications from overlapping during error correction or postprocessing, editing is only
permitted on the basis of a source selected previously. For example, a source can be a cash desk at a point of
sale (POS). For the source, a lock is set exclusively via a created lock object. The lock becomes active as soon
as you switch to edit mode. In edit mode, you can edit or delete the incorrect data records, and add new
records. You can only delete data records that you have added via the RIM.

Views for displaying data records with errors and without errors are available.

The RIM is located in the SAP Menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Document Processing
Start RFNO Inbound Monitor .

The following figure illustrates the process flow within RFNO inbound data processing.
Process Flow

Prerequisites

In Customizing for S4SCSD, you have made the necessary settings under Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) Inbound Data Handling Inbound Monitor and External Data Mapping.

Activities

● Display data records without errors


● Correct errors

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 73
 Note

If you only want to correct master data and Customizing entries, you also have a report available. This is
located in the menu under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Document Processing Process
Data Records with Errors .

Related Information

Inbound Data Processing [page 70]


Correcting Errors in Individual Data Records [page 75]
Displaying Data Records Without Errors [page 74]
Locator [page 168]

4.4.2.1 Displaying Data Records Without Errors

You can use this function to display correct data records of RFNO inbound data processing.

Context

Displaying correct data records is part of the RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM).

Procedure

1. In the RIM, choose the Data Records Without Errors page.


2. Enter the search criteria or select a saved search.
3. Choose Find. The data records found are displayed under Result List.

Application Help for S4SCSD


74 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.4.2.2 Correcting Errors in Individual Data Records

You can use this function to display incorrect data records of RFNO inbound data processing, eliminate the
error causes, and repost the records.

Procedure

1. In the RIM, choose the Error Correction page.


2. Enter the search criteria for the source, or select a saved search.
3. Choose Find. The sources found are displayed under Result List.
A red point indicates that data records with errors were imported. The symbol with the exclamation mark
indicates that the import was not executed because a system error occurred.
If you want to search for individual entries in the result list, select the search criteria in the Search for
Inbound Data area.
4. Select a source. The individual data records are displayed under Incorrect Data Records. When you place
the mouse over the icon in the Number of Messages column, the message text is displayed.
If you want to see the message texts permanently, choose Personalize at the top level. Choose Change
Layout. Under Layout for Section 2, under Add, choose the entry Messages. In the RIM, an additional area
with the title Messages is displayed.
5. Choose Edit. This locks the objects and the pushbuttons in the Incorrect Data Records area are enabled.
6. Select one or more entries in the Incorrect Data Records area:
If you want to view the individual messages and use them to filter, switch to the Error Messages for a Source
tab. Under Message Variables, you can configure that the variables are to be replaced by values in the
messages displayed.
7. In the Incorrect Data Records area, choose Edit Data. The Edit Data Records screen appears. Change the
data records and choose Copy.
8. Choose the Postprocessing pushbutton. The documents are posted to RFNO again, with the changes that
you have made.
You can also perform postprocessing without first editing the data, for example, if you have resolved errors
by making a Customizing setting.

4.4.2.3 Correcting Errors in Multiple Data Records

You can use this function to display incorrect data records of RFNO inbound data processing and correct
multiple data records.

Procedure

1. In the RIM, choose the Error Correction page.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 75
2. Enter the search criteria for the source, or select a saved search.
3. Choose Find. The sources found are displayed under Result List.
A red point indicates that data records with errors were imported. The symbol with the exclamation mark
indicates that the import was not executed because a system error occurred.
If you want to search for individual entries in the result list, select the search criteria in the Search for
Inbound Data area.
4. Select a source. The individual data records are displayed under Incorrect Data Records. When you place
the mouse over the icon in the Number of Messages column, the message text is displayed.
If you want to see the message texts permanently, choose Personalize at the top level. Choose Change
Layout. Under Layout for Section 2, under Add, choose the entry Messages. In the RIM, an additional area
with the title Messages is displayed.
5. Choose Edit, this locks the objects.
6. In the Field Changes to Inbound Data area, select a field and enter the new value.
7. Choose Adopt Changes.

4.4.3 Document Update

Use

Document update is a process that is part of RFNO inbound data processing. Document update uses the
business process information analyzed in business transaction determination and written for the POS Data
interface document to update the POS Data interface documents in the RFNO documents, according to the
rules for business process information. The rules contain the following information:

● Sequential number of the business process.


● Document category to be created or updated.
● Document item category to be created or updated.
● Aggregation class identifies a document to be updated or creates a new document.
● Aggregation step identifies an item to be updated or creates a new item.

You define the rules in Customizing for RFNO, under Document Control Define Document Update .

Prerequisites

You have configured business transaction determination.

You have configured the business process rules for the business transactions.

You have performed business transaction determination.

Application Help for S4SCSD


76 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Process

In the RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM), you can view and correct all data records with errors.

Related Information

Inbound Data Processing [page 70]


Business Transaction Determination [page 71]
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM) [page 72]

4.4.4 Reconciliation of Business Transactions

Use

The RFNO document contains (related to the location, a payment card type, or a payment card contract for
custom payment cards) all business transactions for a sales volume period. Before these business transactions
can be settled, it needs to be ensured that all business transactions are available and that the business
transactions are consistent with each other.

The business transactions are reconciled when the document is checked in the application. Which
reconciliations are performed is configured in Customizing. If the document has been checked, it can be
released for posting. Through posting, the settlement documents for the business transactions are created.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for PAT, you have configured the various checks for the document types.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Document Evaluation, you have defined and assigned analyses for the
reconciliation.

Process

Select the document via the Network Operations Desk (NODe) or from the menu, under Document Processing.
Choose Edit and then Check. The document status changes. Errors are displayed in the log.

If you want to run the check automatically, in the selection criteria for the document update, select that the
documents are to be checked immediately after the document update.

If you store the selection criteria as a variant, you can run the check in the background.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 77
Related Information

Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]

4.4.5 RFNO Consistency Check

This report checks the tables of RFNO inbound data processing for inconsistencies.

Use

If you determine that documents are not posted, execute the report.

You can find the report in Customizing for S4SCSD under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) General
Settings RFNO Consistency Check . When the program is started, the consistency check is executed
directly.

Activities

The result is output as a log.

You can repair certain error categories automatically by choosing Repair Attempt.

You can add custom checks and repair methods to the consistency check. To do so, use enhancement
spot /ICO/RN_CONSISTENCY.

Checks

The following checks are carried out:

● CSN (/ICO/RN_PATCSITM) and DSA (/ICO/RN_PATDSITM) items for which no entry exists in table /ICO/
RN_CTRLOV.
● CSN and DSA documents (/PAT/METADOCS) for which no entries exist in table /ICO/RN_CTRLOV.
● Entries in table /ICO/RN_CTRLOV for which no CSN or DSA documents (/PAT/METADOCS) exist.
● Entries in table /ICO/RN_CTRLOV for which no entries exist in table /ICO/RN_IF_POSTR.

Application Help for S4SCSD


78 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.5 RFNO document

Describes how to use the RFNO documents with the document categories and item categories.

Use

This always includes a sales volume period for a sales location, meaning a point of sale (POS). It starts with the
first business transaction in a period and ends with the last business transaction. This is usually closing. The
best-case scenario is that the document is then complete and can be settled, since all business transactions
should be available at closing. The document should then contain all business transactions for the sales
location.

The document completes the following tasks:

● Display of all business processes that occur at the POS


● Basis for evaluations of the following, for example:
○ Sales
○ Sales volumes
○ Meter reading history
○ Stock differences
○ Price changes
○ Material movements
● Reconciliation of all business transactions, for example:
○ Sales against technical data
○ Card acceptance against clearing house notifications
○ Monitoring of losses in the delivery process
○ Implementation of pricing guidelines
● Settlement of the following, for example:
○ Dealer
○ Agency and third-party agency
○ Clearing house
○ Payment card contracts
● Central control of all subsequent processes, for example:
○ Forwarding of meter data to third-party agencies
○ Maintenance of conditions
○ Creation of settlement documents
○ Stock maintenance
● Message control using Post Processing Framework (PPF)

The document is a document in the Process Automation Toolset (PAT) framework. The settings for the user
interface and field control are part of PAT.

PAT has three document categories, which assume different tasks and provide the option of varying the sales
volume periods. You can change the behavior of the document types, or define new document categories, in
Customizing for RFNO, under PAT .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 79
The documents are usually created and updated using document update. In the RFNO document, the first
aggregation level is realized, to cumulate quantities and totals of business processes of the same type.

To correct differences in the reconciliation, you process the documents in the dialog.

Document Category

DSA

Is the main document and is responsible for displaying and reconciling all business transactions related to the
location. It is the basis for evaluations of sales, material movements, and technical information, for example
meter readings and dip. You use this document to create settlements for all location-related partners.

This is settlements for the following processes:

● Agency and third-party agency transactions


● Dealer settlement
● Commission settlement
● Vendor settlement

You use the document to post material movements and stock differences for the inventory.

CSN

This is a document with an alternative settlement period related to a payment card. In this document, all
business transactions that represent a sale with a payment card are collected and settled with a clearing house
at a chosen point in time. If you receive settlement information from the clearing house, you can reconcile the
information with the sales. The document makes it possible to include payment card limits in the reconciliation.

PSN

This is a document with an alternative settlement period related to a payment card contract that you have
concluded with end customers via payment cards you have issued. In this document, all business transactions
that represent a sale via the payment cards you have issued are collected. You use this document to create
settlements with the business partners, the end customers, of a payment card contract. When sales volume
limits (open items) are exceeded, you can create block documents for the payment cards of a contract.

Item category

In document update, you have configured which business transaction is updated in which document categories
and item categories. The item categories determine the dialog behavior of the document items, and which
subsequent processes are triggered. You configure this in Customizing for RFNO, under Document Control
Allow Item Categories for Process Rules . The item categories are based on item types, to which a possible set
of subsequent processes is assigned.

Application Help for S4SCSD


80 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The following table provides an overview of the RFNO item categories:

Item Category Description/Use

DR_EOD Dip end of day (closing) ● Calculation and posting of stock corrections
The item is excluded from automatic posting. A report
DR_INV Dip for inventory in NORe is available for the mass posting of stock cor­
rections.
DR_PRCHG Dip for price change

DR_SUA Dip reading after delivery ● Transfer of dip reading after a tank delivery

DR_SUB Dip reading before delivery ● Transfer of dip reading before a tank delivery

MR_CR Shortfalls ● Entry of manual corrections for meter reading differen-


ces

MR_CS Set initial meter reading ● Entry of manual corrections for an initial meter reading

MR_EOD End of day ● Reconciliation of sales

MR_PRCHG Price change

PRC_INF Price notification market observation ● Price communications of competitors


You use import interfaces to import the reference prices
into the RFNO-DSA document automatically.

PRC_REQ Market price monitoring price request ● Request a price change for a calculated price

PRC_TAR Target price request ● Request a price change for a target price

SA_AGFC Sales volume agency cash ● Settlement of agency goods


● Commission credits
● Reconciliation against meter

SA_AGFF Sales volume agency fleet cards ● Commission credits


● Reconciliation against meter
SA_AGFP Sales volume agency payment cards

SA_AGFPO Sales volume agency custom payment cards

SA_CS Sales volume payment cards ● Clearing house settlement in CSN document for pay­
ment cards

SA_EGC Sales volume third-party agency cash ● Settlement third-party agency


● Vendor settlement
● Commission settlement
● Reconciliation against meter

SA_EGF Sales volume third-party agency fleet cards ● Vendor settlement


● Commission settlement

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 81
Item Category Description/Use

SA_EGP Sales volume third-party agency payment cards ● Reconciliation against meter

SA_EGPO Sales volume third-party agency custom payment


cards

SA_FC Sales volume fleet cards ● Clearing house settlement in CSN document for fleet
cards

SA_PRC Sales volume dealer goods (shop) cash ● Dealer settlement, if based on shop sales volume

SA_PRF Sales volume dealer goods (shop) fleet cards ● Dealer settlement, if based on shop sales volume
● Vendor settlement
SA_PRP Sales volume dealer goods (shop) payment cards

SA_PRPO Sales volume dealer goods (shop) custom pay­


ment cards

SA_PS Sales volume payment cards ● Payment card contract settlement in PSN document for
custom payment cards

SU_STO Tank delivery ● Transfer the quantity of a tank delivery

WA_AG Goods issue for sales of agency goods ● Material documents

 Note

To make the correct settings, very good knowledge of the PAT area is required.

Related Information

Document Update [page 76]


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) [page 162]

4.6 Processing Documents

Use

You can edit existing documents and create new ones. The following functions are available for document
processing:

● For automatic item changes:


○ Update Documents

Application Help for S4SCSD


82 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
● For posting deactivated documents and creating items for reconciliation. If you do not need to change
items:
○ Edit Location Document
○ Edit Clearing House Document
○ Edit Payment Card Contract Document

 Note

You can deactivate items only if the item status is New or Partly Posted. Items that have the status Fully
Posted or Reversed can no longer be deactivated.

If an item to be deactivated is within a posting block, the following additional conditions apply:

● A single item from a posting block can be deactivated only if it has the status New. In this case, the item
to be deactivated is removed from the posting block in the background and deactivated.
● If the item to be deactivated has the status Partially Posted, only the entire posting block can be
deactivated.

To access document processing from the S4SCSD menu, choose Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Document Processing .

Process Flow

You use these functions to analyze, create, or change documents automatically, based on the selected POS
Data interface documents. For this, you need to have configured business transaction determination.

Updating Documents

1. Select Document Processing and then Update Documents. The Update Documents screen appears.
2. Enter the selection criteria. Choose Execute.
3. The documents are updated.

 Note

If you create a variant, you can execute the report as a background job.

Processing Documents

In the Document Processing menu, select one of the entries Edit Location Document, Edit Clearing House
Document, or Edit Payment Card Contract Document. The Retail Fuel Networks Operations screen appears.
Data relevant to the menu entry selected is displayed.

 Note

To view change documents or customize the toolbar, choose Goto. Choose Time Zone to switch from local
time to the system time. You cannot delete documents, but you can deactivate them. To do this, choose
Deactivate.

Editing Documents

1. Choose Locator.
You can set the locator in Customizing.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 83
2. Enter the search criteria and choose Find.
3. Select an entry in the results list. The related data is displayed in the right-hand area. You can choose
Locator to close the locator so that you can view more data.
4. Choose Edit to change data. For new documents, only new or deactivated items can be changed.
5. Choose Check, Release, and Save. Messages for checking are displayed.

 Note

If you have customized the toolbar, these steps are automatic.

Creating a New Document

1. Choose New.
2. Enter the data.
3. Proceed as described in step 5, under Edit Document.

 Note

Manual creation is possible for correction documents only.

Related Information

Locator [page 168]


Business Transaction Determination [page 71]
Statuses in RFNO [page 84]

4.7 Statuses in RFNO

Shows the statuses of documents and items in Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO).

Document Statuses in RFNO

The following table shows the different document statuses of RFNO:

Document Status Meaning

A In Process

B Checked

C Checked and Released

Application Help for S4SCSD


84 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Document Status Meaning

D Partly Posted

E Partly Posted (Exclusion Exists)

F Posted

G Locked

H Error During Check

I Posted Without End of Day

You define the document statuses in Customizing for S4SCSD under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Process Automation Toolset (PAT) Document Define Document Status for application RN.

Item Statuses in RFNO

The following table shows the different item statuses of RFNO:

Item Status Meaning

A New

B Partly Posted

C Posted

D Deactivated

E Excluded

F Canceled

You define the item statuses as values for the domain Item Status /PAT/ITEM_STATUS.

4.8 Dip Book

You can use this function to post difference quantities of a storage object for a selected period in a DSA
document.

The differences are calculated from the actual dips (actual inventory) and the deliveries and issues (target
inventory).

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 85
For example, the difference can be calculated from the end-of-day meter readings and the end-of-day dip
reading. The items are written to a DSA document. The difference quantities are created and cumulated in
Network Operations Reporting (NORe), in the POWL query Inventory Differences. The difference is then posted
again in the DSA document.

The situation described above is depicted in the following figure:

The items depicted with the item categories are used as examples. Not every item exists in the DSA document.

Related Information

Network Operations Reporting (NORe) [page 102]

4.9 Payment Card Management

Use

This function enables you to manage your own payment cards. That is, payment cards that you have issued
yourself. This includes the licensing to the service stations to billing (invoice creation) with the invoice recipient.

Payment card management also includes billing for credit card payments. The sales volume data from the POS
system is analyzed and collected in the corresponding billing documents for the respective partners. This
means that the billing partner of a payment card document is either a clearing house or a business partner
known to the company.

Application Help for S4SCSD


86 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
You create payment card contracts to represent a business relationship with the invoice recipient. You must
assign each payment card issued to a payment card contract. You can also assign business partners to the
payment card in different RFNO partner roles.

You can expand payment card management for custom payment cards using customer-specific event methods
for certain times during the processes. A connection to a PIN generator, further checks, or prepopulated data
are possible. This has to be implemented in the implementation project in individual cases.

The user interface for the billing documents is based on the PAT framework, which uses the Floor Plan Manager
(FPM) technology for the display. This enables you to make customer-specific adjustments and
personalizations.

 Caution

You can only use payment card management for your own payment cards, meaning payment cards that
you have issued.

You cannot enter numbers of external payment cards.

Always bear in mind the provisions on data protection and data security.

Integration

The billing documents within payment card management, like all billing documents in RFNO, are based on the
PAT framework. This enables documents to be created automatically in other SAP modules. Provided the
respective processes are implemented there. You create and change the business partner master data for the
documents in the SAP Business Partners, using the transaction Edit Business PartnerBP.

Features

● Contract and card master data


● Definition of additional card characteristics
● Partner management and SAP business partners
● Payment card settlement
● Central monitoring in the Network Operations Desk (NODe)
● Integration of the Post Processing Framework (PPF)

Related Information

Post Processing Framework (PPF) [page 95]


Restrictions [page 96]
Role Concept [page 62]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 87
Bonus System [page 94]
Status Management [page 91]

4.9.1 Creating Payment Card Contracts

Prerequisites

Master data

You have processed the master data in the Business Partner transaction.

Customizing

In Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards , you have made at least the
following settings:

● Created at least one partner role profile for payment card contracts and assigned a role to the role profile.
● Created and configured at least one payment card contract type.
● Created and configured the payment card contract status.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP Menu S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network
Operations (RFNO) Custom Payment Cards Create Payment Card Contract . The Create Payment Card
Contract screen appears.
2. Choose Create Contract. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 1 (Partner Roles) screen appears.
3. Choose Maintain Partner Roles. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 1 (Select Role) screen appears.
4. Select a partner role and choose Continue. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 1 (Select Partner)
screen appears.
5. Select a business partner role and choose Continue. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 1 (Validity)
screen appears.
6. Select the validity data. Choose Check and then Submit. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 1
(Partner Roles) screen appears again. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card Contract: Step 2 (Enter
Contract Data) screen appears.

You can modify the user interface for the details to suit your requirements. To do so, you can make
Customizing settings for the Web Dynpro FPM component configuration. Or if different data is to be
displayed for various contract definitions on the detail screen, you need to create a separate configuration
for each set of data. For these settings, see Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Custom
Payment Cards Configuration of Interface .
7. Enter the data and choose Finish.

Application Help for S4SCSD


88 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
You can also save the contract as a draft. The draft is not displayed in the Network Operations Desk
(NODe) [page 100]. To process it later, choose the Continue Editing PC Contract pushbutton on the Create
Payment Card Contract screen.

Results

The payment card contract has been created.

4.9.2 Creating and Deleting a Payment Card

Prerequisites

General

You have created a payment card contract.

Master data

You have created the master data in the Business Partner transaction.

Customizing

You have made the settings in Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards .

Procedure

Creating Payment Cards

1. On the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP Menu S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network
Operations (RFNO) Custom Payment Cards Create Payment Card . The Create Payment Card screen
appears.
2. Choose Create Payment Card. The Create Payment Card: Step 1 (Assign Payment Card Contract) screen
appears.
3. Choose Select Payment Card Contract. Search for a payment card contract. The payment card contracts
found are displayed in the results list.
4. Select the required payment card contract and choose OK. The Create Payment Card: Step 1 (Assign
Payment Card Contract) screen appears again. The data from the payment card contract is displayed.
Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card: Step 2 (Partner Roles) screen appears.
5. Choose Maintain Partner Roles. The Create Payment Card: Step 2 (Select Role) screen appears.
6. Choose a partner role. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card: Step 2 (Select Partner) screen appears.
7. Choose a business partner role. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card: Step 2 (Validity) screen
appears.
8. Select the validity data. Choose Check and Submit.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 89
9. Choose Exit to Main Road Map Step. The Create Payment Card: Step 2 (Partner Roles) screen appears.
Choose Check the Partner Role Profile.
10. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card: Step 3 (Restriction Code and Bonus Systems) screen appears.
11. If required, select one or more restriction codes and one or more bonus systems. If you selected a bonus
system, the system displays additional fields. Enter the data. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card:
Step 4 (Details) screen appears.
12. Choose Continue. The Create Payment Card: Step 5 (Card Number) screen appears.
13. Enter the data and choose Finish. The new payment card has been created.
You can also save the payment card as a draft. To process it later, choose the Continue Processing Payment
Card Contract pushbutton on the Create Payment Card screen. The payment card draft is not displayed in
the Network Operations Desk (NODe).

You can adapt the user interface for the detailed data on the payment card, bonus system, and primary
account number (PAN) to suit your requirements. To do so, you can make Customizing settings for the Web
Dynpro FPM component configuration. Or if different data is to be displayed for various contract definitions on
the detail screen, you need to create a separate configuration for each set of data. For these settings, see
Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Configuration of Surface .

For the payment card number, you can divide the PAN into individual fields to get a better overview and make
only certain parts of the PAN ready for input.

Deleting a Payment Card

You can only delete payment cards to which no active partner is assigned. Therefore, you first need to
deactivate any partners.

Deactivating Partners

1. In the S4SCSD SAP menu, choose Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations Desk
(NODe) .
The Network Operations Desk screen appears.
2. Select the locator ID for payment cards, perform the search, and select an object in the results list.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Select an entry in the partner data area on the Partners tab page and choose End Partner Role.
The End Partner Role, Deactivate dialog box appears.
5. Select the Deactivate Partner checkbox and choose Continue.
6. Choose Save.
Now continue with deleting the payment card.

Deleting a Payment Card

1. In the S4SCSD SAP menu, choose Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations Desk
(NODe) .
The Network Operations Desk screen appears.

2. Choose .
The Personal Toolbox screen appears.

 Note

For more information about the toolbox, see Personal Toolbox.

3. In the Environment for Displaying Functions area, select the Network Operations Desk (NODe) checkbox.
In the Region for Displaying Functions area, Payment Card must be selected.

Application Help for S4SCSD


90 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4. In the Available Tools area, under Payment Card Functions, drag the entry Delete Payment Card to the
Personal Tools area. Choose Save and close the Personal Toolbox screen.
5. On the Network Operations Desk screen, choose the locator ID Payment Card Contracts, Payment Card
Without Card. Enter the search criteria and choose Find.
6. In the results list, select the payment card to be deleted. The screen now has the title <Payment Card
Number>.
7. Choose Edit and Delete Payment Card. The payment card is flagged for deletion.
8. Choose Save.
The entry for the flagged payment card will no longer be displayed in the results list of the next search.

 Note

Only payment cards flagged for deletion can be archived.

Related Information

Restrictions [page 96]


Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Personal Toolbox [page 104]
Archiving RFNO Payment Cards Using /ICO/RNPC [page 237]
Creating Payment Card Contracts [page 88]

4.9.2.1 Status Management

Use

You can define the possible statuses for payment cards and payment card contracts yourself and use them for
your own processes.

The statuses are displayed in the results list of the Network Operations Desk (NODe). This is part of the
delivery.

The status can also be used to control Post Processing Framework (PPF) conditions, for example, the
embossing process. The conditions are not part of the delivery.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for RFNO, you have made the following settings for the status:

Under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Define Payment Card Status , you define the status for
payment cards.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 91
Under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Define Payment Card Contract Status , you define the
status for payment card contracts.

Under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Process Control Set Methods for Status Change of
Payment Card Contracts and Set Methods for Status Change of Payment Cards, you set the conditions in
which the system is to change the status. The specification is made per payment card ID or payment card
contract ID.

Related Information

Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]

4.9.2.2 Payment Card Embossing

Use

After a payment card has been created, it needs to be embossed.

The data required for embossing can be compiled using a customer method.

Prerequisites

In the customer method for editing the embossing data, you have entered the data for the embossing structure
stored in Customizing for the card definition. This data is then stored as a character string in the database as
an embossing order.

Activities

You define the methods in Customizing for RFNO, under General Settings Edit Event Methods of RFNO .
Then choose Payment Cards Embossing Embossing Record Structure or Process the Order in the
menu.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Process Control Set Methods
for Payment Card Management , you enter the data required for embossing, for example, the method and the
structure.

Application Help for S4SCSD


92 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Related Information

Creating and Deleting a Payment Card [page 89]

4.9.2.3 Lock and Release

Use

You can release custom payment cards and payment card contracts, and lock and unlock payment cards.

After embossing, the payment card must be released. The release is permanent.

A lock does not end the release of the payment cards and payment card contracts, rather it only blocks them
until the lock is removed, meaning unlocked. Locks can also have the property that they are final and cannot be
removed.

Lock lists, white lists, and acceptance lists are used to control the payment cards at the location. The
functionalities of these lists depend on the network operator. The lists are created and sent via methods.

Locking, unlocking, and releasing can assign a status for the payment cards and payment card contracts, if you
have configured this in Customizing for Status Management.

Prerequisites

Customizing

You are in Customizing for RFNO.

You have made the necessary settings under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Define Unblocking
Reasons and Define Blocking Reasons.

You have defined the customer methods under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Process Control
Set Methods for Payment Card Management and Blocking .

You have defined the methods for lock documents and release documents, and for lock lists, white lists, and
acceptance lists, under General Settings Edit Event Methods of RFNO . From the menu, choose
Payment Cards Authorization .

You have created the method for creating lists under Payment Cards Payment Cards for Locations Define
Payment Card Profiles . Navigate to Configure Acceptance Lists. In the Edit Acceptance List field, you choose
the method.

Master Data

You configure the method for sending the lists in the Edit Business Partner transaction. Choose the Network
Operator role for the business partner. On the Network Operator tab page, enter the method in the Send field.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 93
Related Information

Payment Card Embossing [page 92]


Status Management [page 91]

4.9.2.4 Bonus System

Use

You can use bonus systems for your custom payment cards. A sample configuration is delivered for this
purpose. The bonus systems can be authorized per payment card definition.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for RFNO, under Custom Payment Cards Define Bonus Systems , you have defined the
bonus systems.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Custom Payment Cards Configuration of Interface Configure Tab Pages
for Bonus Systems , you have configured the tab pages.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Custom Payment Cards Set the Properties of Custom Payment Cards ,
you have assigned the bonus systems under Assign Allowed Bonus Systems to a payment card definition.

Activities

When creating a payment card, enter the bonus system or systems and a validity period. Customer-specific
additional data can be displayed for each bonus system on a detail screen.

Related Information

Creating and Deleting a Payment Card [page 89]

Application Help for S4SCSD


94 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.9.2.5 Primary Account Number (PAN)

Use

When creating a new payment card, the PAN is generated each time the data is changed. The final PAN on
release of the payment card is used for embossing.

The structure of the PAN is customer-specific. For better display, it can be divided into individual field groups,
for example, to make only certain parts of the PAN ready for input.

Prerequisites

You need to define the methods in Customizing for RFNO, under General Settings Edit Event Methods of
RFNO . Choose Payment Card General Cards .

You need to have configured the methods Check Digit Calculation and Create PAN. You can configure the
method Check PAN.

You assign the methods to the payment card in Customizing, under Payment Cards Payment Cards
General Define Payment Cards under Assign Number Ranges.

For the display of the PAN for a payment card definition, you create a custom FPM configuration in
Customizing, under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Configuration of Interface Configure
Payment Card Creation Guided Activity Floorplan (GAF) and Configure Payment Card Tab.

4.9.2.6 Post Processing Framework (PPF)

Use

Payment card management is connected to the PPF.

This enables follow-up processes to be performed automatically based on certain conditions. The actions for
which the PPF is triggered after saving are predefined. In Customizing, assign the action profile to the action.

Current and previous data on the payment card and the payment card contract is available for defining the PPF
conditions.

Prerequisites

You have made the general settings for the PPF.

You have assigned action profiles to the actions in Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Custom
Payment Cards Assign PPF Action Profiles to Actions .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 95
More Information

For more information about the PPF, see http://help.sap.com .

4.9.2.7 Restrictions

Use

You can define restriction codes for custom payment cards. For example, this allows you to control that a
payment card is only valid for fuel.

Prerequisites

Customizing

In Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Payment Cards General Define the Restriction Code ,
you have defined restriction codes.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Payment Cards Payment Cards General Define Payment Cards , you
have assigned the restriction code to the payment card.

In Customizing for RFNO, under Custom Payment Cards Set the Properties of the Custom Payment
Cards under Assign Allowed Restriction Codes, you have assigned the restriction codes to a payment card
definition ID.

Master Data

In the RFNO menu, under Master Data Custom Payment Cards Assign Material Groups to the Restriction
Codes , you can assign the material groups to the restriction codes.

To do so, you need to have defined material groups in SAP Customizing, under Logistics in General Material
Master Settings for Central Fields Define Material Groups .

4.9.3 Maintain Payment Card

Describes various functions for editing your payment cards.

Use

You can use this application to perform various functions for your payment card.

Application Help for S4SCSD


96 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
You can access the application from the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network
Operations (RFNO) Master Data Own Payment Card Edit Payment Cars .

The functions initially create documents or data records in the database. This function only affects the POS
system when the corresponding lists, for example, white list and acceptance list have been created and sent to
the network operator. However, the creation and sending of these lists is a project task.

Dependencies

The functions can be performed in the Network Operations Desk (NODe). However, you need to decide on a
procedure for each function. You decide by converting the event method of the corresponding toolset
functions. Example: To create the release documents, the Create Release Document for Payment Card toolset
function is required. If you still want to use the function in NODe, choose method 111. If you want to use the new
transaction, choose method 1111. The schema with the leading digit 1 is also valid for the other toolset
functions.

Prerequisites

This prerequisite applies to all functions.

Under SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution (S4SCSD) Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) General Settings Edit Event Methods of RFNO , in the menu under NODe Toolset Toolset
Functions , you have configured either the methods for the NODe or for this transaction.

Features

You can choose from the following functions:

● Release
● Locking and Unlocking

Related Information

Release [page 98]


Locking and Unlocking [page 99]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 97
4.9.3.1 Release

Describes how you can release custom payment cards.

Use

After embossing, the payment card must be released. The release is permanent.

If you have set status management in Customizing, you can use the release to assign a status for the payment
card.

Prerequisites

Customizing

Under SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution (S4SCSD) Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) General Settings Edit Event Methods of RFNO , in the menu under Payment Cards
Authorization Release Document , you have defined the methods.

Under SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution (S4SCSD) Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Process Control Set Methods for Payment Card
Management , you have selected the methods.

Activities

Choose a payment card in the Payment Card area. Payment card data is displayed in the Payment Card area.
Data on the release documents is displayed in the Release Documents area. Select an entry. Choose Generate
Release Document. Finally, choose Save.

Related Information

Locking and Unlocking [page 99]


Status Management [page 91]

Application Help for S4SCSD


98 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.9.3.2 Locking and Unlocking

Describes how you can lock and unlock your payment cards.

Use

If a card has been lost, a lock can be performed. You can then perform unlocking when you find the payment
card (PC). You define the reasons for locking and unlocking in Customizing. You can also define which
department is allowed to perform the unlocking.

A lock does not end the release of the payment cards. The PC is only locked until it is unlocked again. You can
also set permanent locks. Then it is no longer possible to unlock the card.

Lock lists, white lists, and acceptance lists are used to control the payment cards at the location. The
functionalities of these lists depend on the network operator. The lists are created and sent via event methods.

If you have set up the Customizing for status management, you can use locking and unlocking to assign a
status for the payment card.

Prerequisites

Customizing

You have made the neccessary settings under SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution
(S4SCSD) Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Define
Unlocking Reasons and Define Locking Reasons. You define the departments involved in the settings for the
locking reasons.

You have selected the customer methods under Payment Cards Custom Payment Cards Process Control
Set Methods for Payment Card Management and Locking .

Activities

Choose a payment card in the Payment Card area. The Payment Card area displays data for the payment card.
The Disconnection Documents area displays data on the disconnection and reconnection documents. Select an
entry. Choose Generate Disconnection Document or Generate Reconnection Document. You must provide a
reason in each case. Finally, choose Save.

Related Information

Release [page 98]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 99
Status Management [page 91]

4.10 Network Operations Desk (NODe)

Use

The Network Operations Desk (NODe) displays data for controlling and monitoring the service station network,
including payment cards. You can start different functions and transactions directly from a launchpad. The
NODe is developed for a low volume of data. Large volumes of data have a significant adverse effect on
performance.

Technically, the NODe is a main component of the Floor Plan Manager (FPM), which is divided into the areas
locator and views. Various views are delivered as standard. However, you can also configure your own views in
Customizing.

Notifications are displayed in a log.

To access the NODe, on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen,
choose SAP Menu Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Classic Functions Network Operations Desk
(NODe) .

Prerequisites

General

You have installed a Web browser.

You have selected the /ICO/S4SCSD area menu or configured it in the user profile.

Master Data

You have used the master data to configure a service station network.

On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP Menu
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data .

Business Partner

You have created business partners in transaction BP. You need to set certain business partners as relevant for
settlement.

Customizing

RFNO

You have configured the necessary settings in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO).

Application Help for S4SCSD


100 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Features

Location

A screen can be displayed for locations. The location screen must exist as a file in the MIME repository. Enter
the path in Customizing for S4SCSD, under RFNO General Settings Set General Parameters . To link the
screen with the location, also enter the name of the screen in the location master data in the Screen Name
group box on the Organization tab page.

Report

A sample for a chart /ICO/RN_CC_NODE_CHART_1 and a sample for a list /ICO/


RN_CC_NODE_LIST_REPORT_1 are shipped with the standard system. The reports are defined based on
Customizing settings. You configure these settings here: In Customizing for S4SCSD under Retail Fuel
Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations Desk (NODe) Define the Reports .

Implement a selection method using the sample method. Finally, integrate the UIBB configuration into the
component configuration of the relevant application. Note that you only use this configuration where the UIBB
can have its own panel and the selection lists are therefore not available.

Activities

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations Desk (NODe) . The Network
Operations Desk screen appears.
2. Select a locator ID in the locator and enter the search criteria. Choose Find. The objects found are
displayed in a tree structure.
You can set the locator in Customizing.

 Note

When selecting a locator ID that contains objects with coordinates, for example, locations or plants,
note the following: If, when you select multiple objects, one or more objects do not have coordinates,
the system does not indicate that coordinates are missing.

3. Select an object. The data for the object is displayed in the right-hand screen area.

 Note

If you choose Refresh, the data in the areas is updated if the individual area does not have its own
pushbutton, such as Find or Execute Report. The data in the locator and on the road map (if you have
chosen the road map pushbutton) is updated when you choose Find in the locator.

Related Information

Locator [page 168]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 101
Messages [page 60]
Configuring Business Partners As Relevant for Settlement [page 67]
Launchpad [page 102]

4.10.1 Launchpad

Use

You can access different applications and transactions directly from the launchpad. It is located on the home
screen of the Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100].

A non-customizable launchpad is delivered with the standard system. You can create your own launchpad in
the transaction Overview of Launchpads LPD_CUST.

Activities

The launchpad is displayed in the following cases:

● You start NODe and have selected a locator ID that does not result in the road map being displayed.
● In other cases, you choose the Views pushbutton and choose START.

4.11 Network Operations Reporting (NORe)

Use

You can use this function to create and display a query for Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO).

NORe is based on standard POWL technology. At design time, a feeder class is written that defines the content
of a POWL query. In the feeder class, the selection criteria for restricting the results list are defined and, if
required, sorted. Possible actions, the result list (columns), and the actual selection for reading the data are
also defined in the feeder. To ensure that the functions from the RFNO tool set are available and integrated, the
abstract ABAP OO class /ICO/RN_CL_FEED_POWL_NORE, which integrates the POWL-feeder interface is
implemented. The queries are assigned to categories.

 Note

In NORe, various queries are shown as examples. However, only the Inventory Differences query is
supported.

Application Help for S4SCSD


102 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The following table shows the categories and queries:

Category Query Use

Logistics Inventory differences Displays all dip measurements in non-


posted or deactivated documents. You use
this query to display the dip measures for
locations, determine differences to the
stock level, release an item for posting, and
post the document.

Prerequisites

You have assigned a POWL category to the user, via a role or directly.

Activities

Configure POWL

The transaction POWL_COCKPIT is provided for configuring the POWL. Use the personalization
application /ICO/RN.

Start NORe

You can find this function under SAP Menu Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Start Network
Operations Reporting (NORe) .

Create Query

You are on the RFNO Reports screen.

1. Choose Define New Query. The RFNO Reports Define New Query screen appears.
2. Select an object type. If a query already exists, you can select it under Select Existing Query as Template.
Choose Maintain Criteria. The RFNO Reports Maintain Criteria screen appears.
3. Select the criteria. To display the data in a results list, choose Preview. Choose the Finish pushbutton. The
RFNO Reports Define New Query screen appears.
4. Enter a description for the query. You can select a category or create a new one. Choose the Finish
pushbutton. The RFNO Reports Active Queries screen appears.

More Information

For more information about the POWL, see POWL Component.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 103
Related Information

Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]

4.12 Personal Toolbox

Use

You can use this function to configure a customized toolbar in various places in the system.

You can configure the Personal Toolbox in the following places by choosing the pushbutton:

● In the business partner transaction BP on the <Role Name> tab page in the Tools group box.
● In transaction /ICO/RN_NODE Network Operations Desk (NODe):
○ In the toolbar
● In transaction /ICO/RN_BOX Personal Toolbox.

Pushbuttons selected in the toolbox are displayed in the following places when you have restarted the
application:

● In the Business Partner transaction BP on the <Role Name> tab page in the Tools group box.
● In transaction /ICO/RN_NODE Network Operations Desk (NODe):
○ In the toolbar
○ In the locator

Prerequisites

Customizing

You have configured the required settings in Customizing for S4SCSD under RFNO Network Operations
Desk (NODe) Tools .

Activities

1. Choose the pushbutton in one of the places mentioned above.


2. Select an environment. This determines which regions are displayed in the next selection.
3. Select a region.
4. Under Available Tools, select a subrow and drag it to Personal Tools.
5. If applicable, select an action in the Actions column.
6. Choose Save.

Application Help for S4SCSD


104 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
To apply the default settings from Customizing, choose the Transfer Presetting pushbutton. Your personal
settings are deleted.

To access the Customizing settings, choose SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution
(S4SCSD) Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations Desk (NODe) Tools Assign
Functions to a Locator and Assign Functions to the Views.

Related Information

Locator [page 168]

4.13 Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR)

Enables the continuous supply of gas stations with materials.

Use

You can use this process to provide service stations with a steady supply of materials based on their
requirements, by continuously calculating and monitoring the expected material consumption. CSR is a
process within Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO).

The aim is to avoid letting a tank run dry. Whereby the critical tank, meaning the tank that reaches the reorder
point first, determines the next delivery time. The other non-critical tanks are always filled completely. The
delivery times and delivery quantities are calculated using a customer method.

The CSR analysis determines the next delivery and an average delivery quantity. A minimum and a maximum
for the delivery quantity are also determined, but the average delivery quantity is used. The result is a results
list. You can edit this results list manually in NODe and this list is the basis for the CSR postprocessing actions
defined by you, for example, creating a sales order and/or sending an e-mail.

Overlays, for example, sporting events, construction sites, holiday periods, and events are taken into account
for the calculation. These overlays have either a positive or negative influence on consumption at the service
station.

The CSR analysis requires information on when which quantity was taken from which tank. You can enter the
data in the system as POS data, meter readings, or dips. The more accurate the data is, the more exact the
CSR analysis. Since the POS data is the most accurate, this is used from inbound data processing of RFNO for
the CSR analysis.

Buckets are used for the CSR analysis. A bucket describes the sales quantity of a product in a defined period at
a location.

You perform the CSR analysis in Network Operations Desk (NODe).

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 105
 Note

You can configure the calculation of the buckets and the CSR analysis as a regular job in Customizing,
under S4SCSD RFNO Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Regular Jobs .

Prerequisites

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) .

You have defined at least one algorithm for the CSR analysis under Define CSR Algorithm. You use methods and
classes to define the algorithm.

So that locations are taken into account in the CSR analysis, in the SAP Menu, under S4SCSD, under Retail
Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Locations Create , you have entered the storage objects
in the master data for the location on the SOC tab page.

To calculate the buckets, in the SAP menu, under S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Master Data Locations Create , you have entered the sales hours and the operations time window set in
the master data for the location on the SCP tab page. You have also specified a factory calendar for the
business type.

 Note

If you do not enter any delivery hours in the Operations Time Window Set group box, for the CSR analysis it
is assumed that the location can always receive deliveries during the sales hours.

Process

The CSR process is integrated into RFNO inbound data processing and saves the dips and raw data in
corresponding tables. The raw data is available aggregated as POS sales with a bucket for a duration of 30
minutes.

Once the raw data for a period is complete, the buckets can be calculated using the raw data. The CSR analysis
can only be started once the buckets have been calculated. Depending on how up-to-date the analysis is to be,
it can be started directly after the bucket calculation, scheduled as a regular background job, or started
manually in NODe. For the CSR analysis, the dips and buckets are used to generate a results list.

You can modify the results list in the analysis result. The results list is the basis for the optional CSR
postprocessing.

Application Help for S4SCSD


106 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The following figure illustrates the process described above:

You define the maximum number of open orders permitted for a location in Customizing for S4SCSD, under
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Configure CSR Object
Parameters . BAPIs are used to create and edit orders. Once an order has been supplied, a new order is
created for this location. A separate table with orders that are relevant for CSR is maintained. Orders created
manually are ignored by CSR. To assign a ship-to party to a location, you have to link the location with RFNO
partner role FS_CSRCU with its business partner and the business partner role RNS007CSR Customer. Using
settlement in business partner role RNS007, you then link to the business partner role FLCU01Customer, which
is used to determine the ship-to party for order creation. The other data required to create the order is read
from an assigned default group.

Related Information

Overlay [page 110]


Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Performing a CSR Analysis [page 114]
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]
CSR Postprocessing [page 115]
Inbound Data Processing [page 70]
Bucket [page 108]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 107
4.13.1 Bucket

Definition

Describes the sales quantity of a product in a defined period at a location.

Use

Buckets are used to calculate the expected delivery date for tanks and materials in Continuous Station
Replenishment (CSR). You configure the size of the period in Customizing. For service stations that need to
receive deliveries often, a small bucket size of 30 minutes, for example, is useful. For service stations that
receive deliveries less often, a bucket size of 4 hours, for example, is useful. The bucket size also depends on
the available data. If, for example, only the entire consumption of a day is reported to the system, it is only
possible to use a bucket size of a day.

When calculating the delivery date, the opening times and delivery times of the location are taken into account.

 Note

You can also run the calculation of buckets as a background job. In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail
Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Regular Jobs Calculate
CSR Buckets , you define the job.

Integration

You define the buckets in Customizing for Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO), under NODe Continuous
Station Replenishment (CSR) Configure CSR Object Parameters .

You assign the buckets to the location in the Network Operations Desk (NODe), using the locator ID CSR
Cockpit: Location on the CSR Parameters tab page.

You define the sales hours and the delivery times in the master data for the location in the S4SCSD menu,
under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Create , on the SCP tab page in the group
box Sales Hours or Operations Time Window Set.

Example

The final n-buckets of a period, for example, Wednesdays 7 p.m. - 8 p.m., are used to calculate a maximum
value, minimum value, and an average value. Example of calculating the current bucket for Wednesday
December 10, 2014, 7 p.m. - 8 p.m.

Application Help for S4SCSD


108 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Date Time Consumption

12/10/2014 7 p.m. to 8 p.m. 300

12/3/2014 7 p.m. to 8 p.m. 250

11/26/2014 7 p.m. to 8 p.m. 280

This results in the following values for the bucket:

● Minimum value: 250


● Maximum value: 300
● Average value: 276.7

The following table shows a specific value for the bucket in the data table:

CSR Data ID Bucket Weekday Consumption Minimum Maximum Average


Date

1 19 4 12/10/2014 250 300 276.6

For a bucket size of an hour, bucket number 19 would be the period between 7 p.m. and 8 p.m.; bucket number
20 would be the period between 8 p.m. and 9 p.m., and so on. The weekday is given a consecutive number from
1 to 7, starting on Sunday.

To calculate the consumption for December 17, 2014, all buckets for weekday = 4 (Wednesday) and CSR data ID
= 1 for this date are read from the database and totaled. Then, the influence of any existing overlays is added or
subtracted. The buckets are saved to the database, cleansed of the overlays. The raw data is not cleansed and
saved in the minimum bucket size. The minimum bucket size is 30 minutes.

To calculate the delivery date and the delivery time, the buckets must be deducted from the last known dip until
the reorder point is reached. In doing so, the opening times of the service station are to be taken into account.
A minimum reserve stock in hours can also be specified. If the service station is closed at the calculated
delivery time, a parameter can be used to control in which direction an alternative date is to be searched for.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 109
The following figure shows the calculation:

Related Information

Overlay [page 110]


Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]

4.13.2 Overlay

Definition

Factors that influence the consumption at a service station either positively or negatively for a period.

Use

Overlays are used in Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR).

Application Help for S4SCSD


110 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Integration

In the Network Operations Desk (NODe), you use the locator ID CSR Cockpit: Location on the Overlay tab page
to define the overlays for a location.

Example

During the period in which fans arrive at a soccer match near the service station, the consumption at the
service station will increase. If the entrance to the service station is impeded by a construction site, the
consumption will decrease.

Related Information

Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]


Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]

4.13.3 Creating and Deleting a CSR Group

Prerequisites

You have defined delivery groups in the S4SCSD menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Master Data Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Edit CSR Delivery Groups .

You have defined group parameters in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Configure Group Parameters for CSR Analysis .

You are on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen.

Procedure

Creating a CSR Group

1. From the SAP Menu, choose S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data
Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Create CSR Group .
The Create CSR Group: Step 1 (Define Group Parameters) screen appears.
2. Enter a freely selectable CSR group ID and other parameters.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 111
 Note

Delivery groups group materials that are assigned to a CSR group. This makes it possible to analyze the
tanks with the selected materials together, and for the deliveries determined for the individual tanks to
trigger each other.

 Note

If you want to change the parameters configured in Customizing for this group, select the Overwrite
Parameters checkbox. Then the following parameters are displayed ready for input.

3. Choose Continue or step 2 Add CSR Objects.


The Create CSR Group: Step 2 (Add CSR Objects) screen appears.

 Caution

You can save without entering an object. The system displays a warning in this case. At the latest, you
then need to add an object when performing the CSR analysis in NODe.

4. If necessary, add a CSR object, such as a location. Choose Save.


5. Close the Create CSR Group screen.

Deleting a CSR Group

1. From the SAP Menu, choose S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Network Operations
Desk (NODe) .
The Network Operations Desk screen appears.

2. Choose .
The Personal Toolbox screen appears.

 Note

For more information about the toolbox, see Personal Toolbox.

3. In the Environment for Displaying Functions area, select the Network Operations Desk (NODe) checkbox.
In the Region for Displaying Functions area, CSR Group View must be selected.
4. In the Available Tools area, under CSR Functions, drag the entry Delete CSR Group to the Personal Tools
area. Choose Save and close the Personal Toolbox screen.
5. On the Network Operations Desk screen, choose the locator ID CSR Groups. Enter the search criteria and
choose Find.
6. In the results list, select the group to be deleted. The screen now has the title Standard View CSR Groups.

7. Choose Edit and . The group is flagged for deletion.


8. Choose Save.
The entry for the deleted group is no longer displayed for the next search.
9. Close the Network Operations Desk screen.

Related Information

Personal Toolbox [page 104]

Application Help for S4SCSD


112 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
4.13.4 Editing CSR Locations
You use this function to display and edit locations for CSR.

Context

Location editing is part of the Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) application. To start editing, choose
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) from the menu. You
can change or create parameters for the CSR analysis in Edit mode.

Procedure

1. Choose the CSR Locations page.


2. Enter the search criteria and choose Find. In the results list, the locations are displayed with the business
type.
3. Select an entry in the results list. The main view appears, in which information on the location is displayed.

You can display, change, or create these parameters:


○ You can change parameters for the subobject on the CSR Subobjects tab page.
Only active subobjects are taken into account in the CSR analysis.
○ Data on sales hours and the operations time window set is displayed on the Operations Time tab page.
○ You change the CSR object parameters and the lead time on the CSR Parameters tab page.
You define the object parameters in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations
(RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Configure CSR Object Parameters .
○ The actual dips are displayed on the Dips tab page.
○ On the Overlays tab, you create overlays as required.
You can display charts on the tab pages Raw Data and Buckets.

 Note

You can personalize the charts. To do so, choose Personalize.

○ On the Raw Data tab page, the minimum buckets with consumption quantities determined from the
POS sales are displayed without influencing the overlays.
○ On the Buckets tab page, the previous and future buckets in the specified period in the defined bucket
size are displayed taking overlays into account.
○ On the Current Filling Level tab page, the target data, meaning the currently calculated filling level of
the individual storage objects, is displayed.
○ The sales orders generated using CSR for this station are displayed on the Order List tab page. You can
navigate to the sales orders.

 Note

The data that you have changed only comes into effect when you choose the ENTER key for the
respective field.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 113
Related Information

Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]


Performing a CSR Analysis [page 114]
Bucket [page 108]
Overlay [page 110]
Locator [page 168]

4.13.5 Performing a CSR Analysis

You use this function to analyze the CSR groups and perform postprocessing.

Context

The analysis is part of the Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) application. To start the analysis, choose
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Start Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) from the menu.

Procedure

1. Choose the CSR Groups page.


2. Enter the search criteria and choose Find. The CSR groups are displayed in the results list.
3. Choose a CSR group. The data on the CSR group is displayed on the right-hand side. You can add or
remove CSR objects, for example, locations.
4. Choose Edit to change the group if necessary. Save your changes.
5. In the CSR Objects area, choose the Start CSR Analysis pushbutton. The Results of CSR Analysis dialog box
appears. The results list and the log messages are displayed there.
6. To view a chart of the development of the stocking situation for a selected CSR object, choose Display
Chart. The Chart for Analysis Result dialog box appears. The consumption of the individual storage objects
is displayed as a line chart there.
7. To start the optional postprocessing, choose Start Postprocessing in the Result of CSR Analysis dialog box.

You can also run the CSR analysis as a background job. In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel
Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) Regular Jobs Perform CSR
Analysis , you define the job.

Related Information

CSR Postprocessing [page 115]

Application Help for S4SCSD


114 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]
Locator [page 168]

4.13.6 CSR Postprocessing

Use

With the optional CSR postprocessing, it is possible to start actions that you have defined after the CSR
analysis has been performed, for example, the sending of an e-mail or the creation of a sales order.

Prerequisites

In the S4SCSD menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Continuous Station
Replenishment (CSR) Edit CSR Default Groups , you have entered the default values for the action, for
example, creating a sales order.

In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station
Replenishment (CSR) Define CSR Postprocessing Activity , you have defined the actions to be performed
and assigned a method.

In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Continuous Station
Replenishment (CSR) Edit CSR Postprocessing Groups , you have grouped the defined postprocessing
actions.

 Note

When performing the CSR analysis as a background job, the postprocessing actions set actively as a
preselection are performed directly.

Process

1. Perform the CSR analysis.


The Results of CSR Analysis dialog box appears.
2. Choose Start Postprocessing.
The Postprocessing dialog box appears.
3. Select the actions to be performed and choose Perform Postprocessing.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 115
Related Information

Performing a CSR Analysis [page 114]

4.13.7 Service Station Overview (App)

You can use this app to display general information for your existing gas stations. Related documents and
partners are displayed in detail views. The app has the Fiori ID F4030.

Features

This app provides the following key features:

● Display an overview of your own gas stations with this data and functions:
○ Search function
○ Sort function
○ Name
○ Geographical assignment
○ Opening status
To receive a list of documents and partners for this gas station, choose a gas station from the list.
● Display of additional data for the gas station:
○ The gas station screen
○ Link to the transaction Display Location
○ Address
● Display a list of current documents for the selected gas station with this data and functions:
○ Search function
○ Period selection
○ Possible settings for sorting
○ Document data
○ Link to the Edit Location Document transaction
● Display a list of partners for the selected gas station with this data and functions:
○ Partner data
○ Link to the transaction Display Business Partner

You can change the size of the screen areas.

This app uses the following CDS views:

● /ICO/RNL_ADDRESS
● /ICO/RNL_AREAASS
● /ICO/RNL_AREAM
● /ICO/RNL_DOCHEAD
● /ICO/RNL_DOCS

Application Help for S4SCSD


116 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
● /ICO/RNL_HEADER
● /ICO/RNL_LASTSTS
● /ICO/RNL/LOCATOR
● /ICO/RNL_LOCMAN
● /ICO/RNL_PRTHEAD
● /ICO/RNL_PRTNERS
● /ICO/RNL_REGIONM
● /ICO/RNL_SAREAM
● /ICO/RNL_STATION
● /ICO/RNL_STATUS
● /ICO/RNL_STNPIC

Prerequisites

In the SAP Menu, under S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Assignment of
Persons Responsible in Network Assign Head and Team to a Geographical Region , you need to assign users
to a region, area, or subarea for a country/region, so that they can view the stations in the app.

In the SAP Menu, under S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Master Data Assignment of
Persons Responsible in Network Define Teams , you can form a team out of several users. You can then
assign the team to a region, area, or subarea under Assign Head and Team to a Geographical Region.

These assignments are displayed in the transactions for locations CreateO401, ChangeO402, and DisplayO403
on the tab page Assignment.

Fiori Launchpad (FLP)

In the FLP, you need to select one of these two roles to get the app:

● SAP_BR_RFNOLOCOPERATOR_IOG
● SAP_BR_RFNOBOFFICE_IOG

Supported Device Types

● Desktop
● Tablet

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 117
4.14 Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP)

Use

This function is used to determine the sales prices ("target prices") for the sale of materials in locations within
a service station network. It is controlled by means of scenarios. The competitor scenario is executed first,
followed by the location group scenario. This can take place either manually or as process-driven background
processing by means of the Process Automation Toolset (PAT). Depending on the scenario, different pricing
methods are available.

The reference prices from market price monitoring and of the reference location are processed by a BAPI
provided for the purpose and written to an RFNO-DSA document, where they are available for pricing. The
target prices are also written to RFNO-DSA documents, from where they can be used for further processes.

The process described above is depicted in the following graphic:

Pricing Process

You can track price changes in Network Operations Reporting (NORe) using the query Competitor prices and
price requests.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD), you have configured the
settings under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) .

Application Help for S4SCSD


118 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Related Information

Process Automation Toolset (PAT) [page 162]


Network Operations Reporting (NORe) [page 102]
Competitor Scenario [page 119]

4.14.1 Competitor Scenario

Use

In this scenario, the imported reference prices of competitors are used as a basis for calculating the target
prices.

This calculation takes place per material.

Prerequisites

Master data

Location

You have entered attributes for your own service stations and competitor service stations for the location at
business type level. You assign the margin calculation schemas and competitors that directly influence or
determine pricing.

You can find this setting in the SAP Menu under SAP Logistics Sales and Distribution Service Station
Retailing Master Data Location .

Price Differences

You have entered fixed price differences in the SAP Menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) Master Data Change the Price Differences in the Competitor Scenario .

Process

The current prices of competitors are used as a basis for the new target prices at your own service station.
These prices are transferred to the head office and copied to an RFNO-DSA document. Surcharges and
discounts are applied to the current competitor prices. These surcharges and discounts are configured in the
competitor differences.

Three methods for calculating target prices are available in the system:

● Lowest price

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 119
The following graphic shows how the target price is calculated using the lowest price method:

● Highest margin
The following graphic shows how the target price is calculated using the highest margin method.

● Mixed price
The following graphic shows how the target price is calculated using the mixed price method.

Application Help for S4SCSD


120 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
The price calculated using one of these methods is copied to the RFNO-DSA document as the new target price
for your own service station and transferred to the service station.

4.14.1.1 Executing the Competitor Scenario

Procedure

You are on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen.

1. From the SAP Menu, choose Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) . The
Retail Fuel Pricing screen appears.
2. Choose Competitor Scenario. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 1 (Parameters) screen appears.
3. Enter the data and choose Continue. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 2 (Calculation) screen appears.
The reference prices are displayed in the Competitors area, in the Condition Amount column. The
corresponding RFNO-DSA document is displayed in the Document Number column.
4. Choose Calculate Lowest Price, Calculate Largest Margin, or Calculate Mixed Price. The target prices
calculated are displayed in the Own Location area.

 Note

For the mixed price, the lowest price with the largest margin is calculated.

Choose Display Margin Calculation to open the condition schema of a selected line. Choose Display Price
Differences to open the master data of the price differences. You can also display this master data from the
SAP Menu, by choosing Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) Master
Data .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 121
5. Choose Continue. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 3 (Target Prices) screen appears.
6. Select the prices to be applied in the Target Prices area and choose Transfer the Target Price. The Retail Fuel
Pricing screen appears again. The number of the RFNO-DSA document is displayed.
The target prices are saved in the RFNO-DSA document as item category PRC_TAR.

Result

Edit the document in the Edit Location Document transaction. The transaction is located in the SAP Menu,
under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Document Processing Edit Location Document .

4.14.2 Location Scenario

Use

In this scenario, the new target prices for all service stations within a price grouping are calculated based on a
reference location.

This calculation takes place per material.

Prerequisites

You have performed pricing with the competitor scenario for a location. These prices are then available as
reference prices in an RFNO-DSA document as item category PRC_TAR.

Master Data

Location

You have entered attributes for your own service stations and price grouping for the locations at business type
level. You assign the margin calculation schemas and competitors.

You can find this setting in the SAP Menu under SAP Logistics Sales and Distribution Service Station
Retailing Master Data Location .

Price Differences

You have entered fixed price differences in the SAP Menu, under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) Master Data Change the Price Differences in the Location Scenario .

Process

The current price for a reference location is used as the basis for the new target price at your own service
stations. This price is transferred to the head office and saved in an RFNO-DSA document. Surcharges and

Application Help for S4SCSD


122 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
discounts are applied to the current prices within a price group. These surcharges and discounts are configured
in the location differences. The prices calculated are copied to the RFNO-DSA document as new target prices
for each service station of a price grouping.

The following graphic illustrates the situation described above for a price group.

Location Scenario

4.14.2.1 Executing the Location Group Scenario

Context

You are on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Menu, choose Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP) . The
Retail Fuel Pricing screen appears.
2. Choose Location Group Scenario. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 1 (Parameters) screen appears.
3. Enter the data and choose Continue. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 2 (Calculation) screen appears. The
reference prices are displayed in the Own Location area, in the Condition Amount column. The
corresponding RFNO-DSA document is displayed in the Document Number column.
4. Choose the Calculate Target Price pushbutton. The target prices calculated are displayed in the Dependent
Locations area. Choose Display Margin Calculation to open the condition schema of a selected line. Choose
Display Price Differences to open the master data of the price differences. You can also display this master

Application Help for S4SCSD


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) PUBLIC 123
data from the SAP Menu, by choosing Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Retail Fuel Pricing (RFP)
Master Data .
5. Choose Continue. The Retail Fuel Pricing: Step 3 (Target Prices) screen appears.
6. Select the prices to be applied in the Target Prices area and choose Transfer the Target Price. The Retail Fuel
Pricing screen appears again. The number of the RFNO-DSA document is displayed. The target prices are
saved in the RFNO-DSA documents of the dependent locations as item category PRC_TAR.

Results

Edit the document in the Edit Location Document transaction. The transaction is located in the SAP Menu,
under Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Document Processing Edit Location Document .

4.14.3 Report Competitor Prices (App)

You can use this app to report sales prices of competitors to your head office. These can be used to calculate
your own prices. The app has the Fiori ID F2168.

Features

This app provides the following key features:

● Display of last known prices for a competitor


● Entry of current material prices for a competitor
● Adoption of prices in location documents as the basis for target price calculation

Fiori Launchpad (FLP)

In FLP, you need to select this role to get the app:

● SAP_BR_RFNOLOCOPERATOR_IOG

Supported Device Types

● Desktop
● Tablet

Application Help for S4SCSD


124 PUBLIC Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
5 Data Collation (DC)

Includes all processes for comparing and adjusting the delivered and the planned materials and quantities.

Use

This component enables the automatic or manual confirmation and adjustment of the material and quantities
actually delivered. An immediate quantity correction is made on the basis of the planned quantities.
Warehouse stock postings are made automatically. The billing documents are prepared on the basis of the
confirmed quantities.

The progress and result of processing are recorded in logs.

For example, differences can arise due to the fact that the delivered quantity differs from the ordered quantity,
or that the customer only purchases another material on delivery.

Predefined document categories and item categories control the data collation process.

Data collation documents are generated using different methods:

● IDoc via interfaces


● Web service
● BOR object
● BAPI
● Manual entry on the user interface of the data collation transactions

Integration

Data collation integrates and automates frequently used processes in Materials Management (MM) and Sales
and Distribution (SD).

It therefore represents a direct connection of MM and SD processes, such as procuring materials, creating and
changing sales contracts, sales orders, and deliveries.

Prerequisites

To enable the data collation to transfer the handling type and the external details when creating purchasing
documents, activate the BAdI implementation ME_BAPI_PO_CRT_IBS.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 125
Types of Data Collation

Standard Data Collation

This is required if inventory management is not to be performed for a vehicle.

The items contained are not dependent on each other and are posted separately. If an item is not posted, the
others can still be posted.

The following main processes are supported:

● Sales
From user's own storage or directly from vendor via a third-party plant.
● Storage supply
Filling user's own storage through a purchase order with a vendor.
● Forwarding agent loading
From user's own storage or directly from vendor.
● Stock transfer
Result of a stock transport order for material from one storage to another.

The following figure shows the standard data collation processes:

Vehicle-Related and Forwarding-Agent-Related Data Collation

For vehicle-related data collation only: This is required if inventory management is to be performed for user's
vehicle. Plant and storage location are the vehicle.

For forwarding-agent-related data collation only: This is required if inventory management is to be performed
for a forwarding agent's vehicle. Plant and storage location are the forwarding agent.

For both: The items contained are dependent on each other.

Application Help for S4SCSD


126 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
The following main processes are supported:

● Loading
● Postings to the vehicle
○ Flushing
○ Differences
● Unloading

Trip-Related Data Collation

Stock is managed in the means of transport. Stock may only remain at the end if the stock is explicitly declared
as remaining quantity. Meaning that certain tolerances for gain and loss are possible.

The items contained are dependent on each other.

Additional Functions

You can use mass posting to post a large number of documents.

You can archive the documents that are created and use the multireference function.

Related Information

Document Category [page 128]


Item Category [page 128]
Document Categories and Item Categories in Data Collation [page 144]
Multireference [page 34]
Handling mass posting [page 133]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 127
Archiving DC Documents with /PAT/DOCS [page 233]
Trip-Related Data Collation [page 224]

5.1 Document Category

Definition

The document category controls which input fields are available at header level. The document category also
determines the possible item categories.

Item categories control the entire procedure for a certain business process. For example, documents can be
created or changed in the components MM or SD.

Related Information

Item Category [page 128]


Document Categories and Item Categories in Data Collation [page 144]

5.2 Item Category

Definition

Each item category controls the entire process of document creation and posting for a certain business
process. For example, documents can be created or changed in the components MM or SD.

Integration

Each item category is assigned to one or more document categories. A data collation document can only be
posted if such a combination has been defined.

A cancellation item category is assigned to each item category wherever possible and useful. This makes it
possible to cancel a data collation document correctly.

A reference document category and related search help is assigned to each item category that refers to
another document.

Application Help for S4SCSD


128 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Related Information

Document Category [page 128]


Document Categories and Item Categories in Data Collation [page 144]

5.3 Creating and Posting a Data Collation Document

Describes how you can manually create and post a data collation document.

Use

There is no difference in the general process for the data collation types. However, depending on the data
collation type, specific fields are displayed in the Header Data area of the home screen. It is controlled by the
document category. The posting process is controlled by the document type.

Types

These types of data collation exist:

● Standard data collation


● Means-of-transport-related data collation
● Forwarding-agent-related data collation
● Trip-related data collation (only for S4IDM)

Prerequisites

Customizing

In Customizing for S4SCSD, you have made the settings under Data Collation (DC) .

Master Data

In General for Data Collation

You have defined default values for the units of measure in the S4SCSD menu under Data Collation (DC)
Master Data Determine Units of Measure .

You can make this setting so that the units of measure are found automatically when entering the data collation
document. If you do not make this setting, the unit of measure in the material master is suggested.

Data collation related to means of transport

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 129
You have assigned a plant to your means of transport in the S4SCSD menu under Data Collation (DC)
Master Data Assign Plant to Vehicle .

You need to make this setting so that you can use the document category VEHICLE.

Forwarding-Agent-Related Data Collation

You assigned a plant to the forwarding agents in the S4SCSD menu under Data Collation (DC) Master Data
Assign Plant to Forwarding Agent .

You need to make this setting so that you can use the document category FWDAGENT.
Trip-Related Data Collation

You have assigned a plant to the equipment vehicle in the S4SCSD menu under Data Collation (DC) Master
Data Assign Plant to Equipment Vehicle .

Means-of-Transport-Related, Forwarding-Agent-Related, and Trip-Related Data Collation

You have set the tolerances for the difference quantities in the S4SCSD menu under Data Collation (DC)
Master Data Set the Difference Quantity Tolerance .

For means-of-transport-related, forwarding-agent-related, and trip-related data collation, inventory


management is performed for the means of transport. Stock may only remain at the end if it is explicitly
declared as remaining quantity. Meaning that certain tolerances for gain and loss are possible. Here, you also
use a method to configure how the system is to react to an excess or shortfall.

Process Flow

Create Data Collation Document

1. Choose the data collation type from the SAP Easy Access Main Menu from the SAP Menu Data
Collation (DC) . The Data Collation screen appears. The data collation type and the document type are
also displayed.
2. Choose New.
3. Enter header data if required. Insert one or more items. To do so, choose Add Item. The document has
status A.
Continue with step 5 in the next section Post Data Collation Document.

Post Data Collation Document

1. Choose the data collation type from the SAP Easy Access Main Menu from the SAP Menu Data
Collation (DC) . The Data Collation screen appears. The data collation type and the document type are
also displayed.
2. Choose Locator. The locator area is displayed. Enter the search criteria. Choose Find. The documents
found are displayed in the results list.
3. Select a document. The document data is displayed in the right-hand screen area.
Choose Locator to close the locator. This leaves more space to display the data.
4. Choose Edit. The document has the status A. Edit the data.
You can also deactivate a document. The status then changes to G. After this, however, the document can
no longer be edited. It is not possible to delete the document.

Application Help for S4SCSD


130 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
5. Choose Verify. The status changes to B.
6. Choose Release. The status changes to C.
7. Save the document.
8. Choose Process. The status changes to F. The data collation document was posted.

For means-of-transport-related, forwarding-agent-related, and trip-related data collation, you have the option
of performing a difference adjustment. To do so, choose the Difference Adjustment pushbutton.

 Note

If an error occurs at a particular level in the document, for example, at header level, no actions (for
example, deleting an item) can be executed at subordinate levels. To edit a subordinate level, you first have
to correct the error at the superordinate level.

Change Data Collation Document

1. Choose a data collation type from the SAP Easy Access Main Menu from the SAP Menu Data Collation
(DC) . The Data Collation screen appears.
2. Choose Locator. The locator area is displayed. Enter the document number. Choose Find. The document is
displayed in the results list.
3. Select the document. The document data is displayed in the right-hand screen area.
4. Choose Edit. Edit the data.
5. Save your entries.

 Note

No further changes can be made to documents with the status F.

 Note

You can set the locator in Customizing.

Related Information

Locator [page 168]


Trip-Related Data Collation [page 224]
Statuses in Data Collation [page 156]

5.4 Cancellation of a Data Collation Item

Use

You can cancel one or more items of a posted data collation document with a cancellation item category.

Either enter a cancellation item manually or use this automated process.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 131
Prerequisites

The Cancel pushbutton is available in the standard system. If the pushbutton is not available, you can add it by
making the corresponding settings in Customizing.

To do so, in Customizing for SAP Easy Access Main Menu, choose Data Collation (DC) Process Automation
Toolset (PAT) Dialog Define Toolbar Schema . Define a toolbar schema for the application DC or modify an
existing one. In the Define Pushbutton step, method 2 has to be assigned.

In the Customizing activity Define Document Categories, assign the toolbar schema to a document category.

You can configure the automatic cancellation function in Customizing under Data Collation (DC) Data
Collation Documents Set the Cancellation Function .

In the second step, you assign a cancellation item category to each item category, depending on the document
category. You can also add a method that determines the cancellation item category dynamically.

Process Flow

The process with the cancellation functions Create, Check, and Release Cancellation Document for
an item is described here.

1. In data collation, select the item be canceled in the Item Data area.
2. Choose the Cancel pushbutton. An item with the cancellation item category is created. The document has
status C.
3. Choose Process. The document has status F.

Result

The item has been canceled.

If you have selected multiple items for cancellation, these are canceled in reverse order and also displayed in
this order.

Related Information

Cancellation of a Data Collation Item [page 131]

Application Help for S4SCSD


132 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
5.5 Handling mass posting

Use

This function allows you to post a large number of documents in data collation in the background. You can also
display the status and logs for documents already posted. You can also post just one document.

Prerequisites

You are in the SAP Menu, under Data Collation (DC) Execute Mass Posting .

Procedure

You can see the posting status of the documents in the structure. The following table provides an overview of
the statuses:

Symbol Status Meaning

A In Process

B Checked

C Released

D Partly Posted

E Partly Posted, Locks Exist

F Posted

G Deactivated

H Canceled

Individual Posting

1. Enter the values for the selection parameters and choose . The Mass Posting - Document Number:
screen appears. The documents found are displayed in the left-hand area in a structure.
2. Select the documents to be posted in the structure.
3. Choose Post.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 133
4. To view the messages for a document after the posting process, double-click on the document in the
structure. The messages are displayed on the right-hand side.

Mass Posting

1. Enter the values for the selection parameters and choose Program Execute in Background from the
menu. The <System>Background Print Parameters dialog box appears.
2. Enter the parameters.
Once the job has been executed, you can call up the logs for the documents. Proceed as described under
Individual Posting, steps 1 and 4.

5.6 Freight Cost Generation

Generates an item in the data collation document from freight-relevant items.

Use

From freight-relevant items, freight cost generation generates an item in the data collation document that pays
the freight costs to the forwarding agent.

The generated item can be reversed by a normal reversal.

The data for the freight purchase order is subject to the incompleteness control (ICC). Splitting into several
freight purchase orders is also an option.

 Restriction

A freight purchase order can only be reversed completely.

Application Help for S4SCSD


134 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
The following figure shows the process flow for a purchase order:

The following figure shows the process flow for a delivery:

Prerequisites

In Customizing for Process Automation Toolset (PAT), under General Settings Mapping Define Mapping
Schema and Assign Mapping Groups , you have made the settings.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 135
In Customizing for Data Collation (DC), under Data Collation Documents Set Freight Cost Generation , for
each document type, you can define which event method is to be called for the creation of a freight cost item.
You also define which item type and therefore which item categories are freight-relevant. Here, you can enter a
mapping schema for the item data of the freight cost item. This mapping schema can then be used in the event
method.

5.7 Material Transfer Posting

Describes how you can reclassify materials automatically or manually.

Use

The material transfer posting takes place in the data collation, either manually or automatically. This function is
in the Item Data area. Select an item in the Detail Data area, on the Transfer Posting tab page.

During the automatic transfer posting, the system uses the settings in the master data table. During the
manual transfer, you enter the data. Manual transfer posting is therefore independent of the master data table.

You can, for example, reclassify a source material to another sales material. This may be necessary, for
example, if the sales material is to receive a different name than the source material.

You can also create a sales material from several stock materials. The sales material is then a mixed product.

Prerequisites

From the SAP Easy Access screen, under S4SCSD General Material Transfer Define Material Transfer
Postings , you have set the transfer rules for the automatic transfer postings.

Related Information

Mixed Products [page 213]

5.8 Country-Specific Functions

Describes the country-specific functions of Data Collation (DC).

This documentation explains the country-specific functions.

Application Help for S4SCSD


136 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
5.8.1 Portugal

Describes the country-specific functions of Data Collation (DC) for Portugal.

In Portugal, the law requires all companies to send an online notification of all domestic goods movements to
the tax authorities Autoridade Tributária (AT). Goods movements from or to outside Portugal are not subject to
this law.

One of the permitted ways of transferring data is to use a Web service.

The information sent can be viewed in a monitor.

Prerequisites

You have made the following settings in Customizing for S4SCSD:

● Under Data Collation (DC) Digital Signature (S4SCSD Data Collation) Digital Signature Portugal
○ Assign Company Code to Number Range Interval
Here you assign a number range interval to the company code in question.
○ General Settings
Here, you set the delivery type and set indicators for the digital signature and the Web service.
○ Assign Relevant Loading Item Categories
Here you assign the relevant item categories for loading to the document category.

SAP Notes

For more information, see the following SAP Notes:

● 2854769 DC: Enhancement for Digital Signature for Deliveries in Portugal


● 2868340 PAT: Generic Mapping

Related Information

Monitoring Tool [page 137]


Processes in DC Before Outbound Delivery [page 138]
Processes in DC After Outbound Delivery [page 143]

5.8.1.1 Monitoring Tool

Displays the information sent to the Autoridade Tributária (AT) tax authorities.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 137
Use

You use the monitoring tool to display processes for transferring the data to AT. For more information, see the
report documentation.

You access the report from the SAP Easy Access main menu, via SAP Menu SAP Logistics Sales and
Distribution Shipping and Transportation Outbound Delivery Country Specifics Portugal Monitoring
Tool for Web Services . The transaction code is WSPT_MONI.

5.8.1.2 Processes in DC Before Outbound Delivery

Describes the process steps in Data Collation (DC) before delivery.

Use

Here, the discharge items are excluded from the posting. Only the DC document with the loading items is
posted. When the data is saved, the Post Processing Framework (PPF) is triggered. The relevant standard SAP
APIs are called to transfer the data to the monitor and to the tax authorities.

Scenarios

These scenarios are available:

Scheduled

In this scenario, the DC document cannot be posted. The Process button cannot be selected.

In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution (S4SCSD), under Data Collation
(DC) Digital Signature Digital Signature Portugal General Settings , in the column Tax, you must have
configured the value 1Scheduled.

Loading

This scenario is used for the loading phase of the process.

 Caution

After the delivery has been created, a further transfer to the tax authorities is executed with the relevant
data that also includes the discharge items. However, this does not take place as part of data collation. You
must make these settings during implementation, in cooperation with SAP.

Application Help for S4SCSD


138 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
In Customizing for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution (S4SCSD), under Data Collation
(DC) Digital Signature Digital Signature Portugal General Settings , in the column Tax, you must have
configured the value 2Fully Loaded.

Related Information

Scenario Planned [page 139]


Loading Scenario [page 141]

5.8.1.2.1 Scenario Planned

Here you find the steps required for the Planned scenario.

Context

For the scenario Planned with the transportation status Planned, perform the following steps.

Procedure

1. Start the Vehicle-Related Data Collation in the menu.


2. Choose New. The status is AIn Process.
3. Enter the TU Number. Select ENTER .
4. Under Communication Tax Authorities, choose Planned. Enter the Transport Start Date and Transport Start
Time.
5. Enter the item data for the loading and unloading.
6. Choose Verify. The status changes to BVerified.
7. Choose Release. The status changes to PReleased (without posting).
8. Choose Save.

Results

The PPF process performs these actions:

● The system creates a digital signature that is saved in the table /PAT/DC_SIGN_PT.
● The data is saved in the table WSPT_LIKP and transferred to the tax authorities.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 139
● The data is transferred to the monitor. The transaction for the monitor is WSPT_MONI.

Related Information

Changes to the Planned Scenario [page 140]


Post Document [page 141]

5.8.1.2.1.1 Changes to the Planned Scenario

This section describes how you make changes to the Planned scenario.

Context

You make changes to the Planned scenario with the Planned transportation status as follows.

Procedure

1. Start the Vehicle-Related Data Collation in the menu.


2. Start the Locator. Search for the document. Click the row containing the document.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Make the changes. The status is AIn Process.
5. Choose Verify. The status changes to BVerified.
6. Choose Release. The status changes to PReleased (without posting).
7. Choose Save.

Results

The PPF process performs these actions:

● The system creates a digital signature that is saved in the table /PAT/DC_SIGN_PT.
● The current data is sent to the tax authorities. In table WSPT_LIKP the old data record has the status
CCanceled. The new data record has the status AApproved.
● The data is transferred to the monitor. The transaction for the monitor is WSPT_MONI.

Application Help for S4SCSD


140 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
5.8.1.2.1.2 Post Document

Here you find the steps to post the DC document.

Context

If the final data is known, you have to post the DC document.

 Note

No new digital signature is created. No information is sent to the tax authorities. The main purpose is to
enable the posting of the DC document.

Procedure

1. Start the Vehicle-Related Data Collation in the menu.


2. Start the Locator. Search for the document. Click the row containing the document.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Under Communication Tax Authorities, choose Executed. The status is AIn Process.
5. Choose Verify. The status changes to BVerified.
6. Choose Release. The status changes to PReleased (without posting).
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Process. The status changes to FPosted.

Results

The DC document is posted.

5.8.1.2.2 Loading Scenario

Here you find the steps that are necessary for the Loading scenario.

Context

You perform the following steps for the Loading scenario with the Completely Loaded transportation status.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 141
Procedure

1. Start the Vehicle-Related Data Collation in the menu.


2. Choose New. The status is AIn Process.
3. Enter the TU Number. Select ENTER .
4. Enter the item data for the loading and unloading.
5. Choose Verify. The status changes to BVerified.
6. Choose Release. The status changes to CReleased.
7. Choose Save.
8. Choose Process. The status changes to EPartially Posted (Locks Exist).

Results

The PPF process performs these actions:

● The system creates a digital signature that is saved in the table /PAT/DC_SIGN_PT.
● The data is saved in the table WSPT_LIKP and transferred to the tax authorities.
● The data is transferred to the monitor. The transaction for the monitor is WSPT_MONI.

Related Information

Changes to the Loading Scenario [page 142]

5.8.1.2.2.1 Changes to the Loading Scenario

This section describes how you make changes to the Loading scenario.

Context

You make changes to the Loading scenario with the Completely Loaded transportation status as follows.

Procedure

1. Start the Vehicle-Related Data Collation in the menu.

Application Help for S4SCSD


142 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
2. Change the document. To cancel the posting exclusion for an item, select the item and choose Exclude
Item from Posting.
3. Choose Verify. The status changes to BVerified.
4. Choose Release. The status changes to CReleased.
5. Choose Save.
6. Choose Process. The status changes to EPartially Posted (Locks Exist).

Results

The DC document number is displayed as Header Note 1 in the outbound delivery document in the transaction
Display Outbound DeliveryVL03N under Goto Header Texts . This setting is located in Customizing,
under Data Collation (DC) Digital Signature Digital Signature Portugal General Settings . In the UI
column, choose the text object. For Header Memo 1, this is the value 0002.

5.8.1.3 Processes in DC After Outbound Delivery

Describes the process steps in Data Collation (DC) after delivery.

Use

After the discharge items have been updated with the actual delivery data, they are posted.

Documents for outbound deliveries and goods issues are created via SAP BAPI. During implementation, in
collaboration with SAP experts, it must be checked which of the modules mentioned has already been used to
establish a connection to the Portuguese tax authorities. You need to enhance this BAPI.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 143
5.9 Document Categories and Item Categories in Data
Collation

Here you find a table with the Document Categories and Item Categories in DC.

Sales/3rd Party

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CSC STANDARD XCS

Customer Sales: Contract RCS

By means of this item category, a delivery is created with reference to a sales contract. The system will create a sales order
and a delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible. It is possible to use the
sales contract only to copy data into the Data Collation, so that the sales order will be created without any reference. If a
third-party plant is involved, a purchasing process will be posted first.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CSD STANDARD XCS

Customer Sales: Delivery RCS

By means of this item category, a delivery is changed. The system will change the already existing sales order and the deliv­
ery and will post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible. If a third-party plant is involved, a
purchasing process will be posted first.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CSN STANDARD XCS

Customer Sales: Without Documents RCS

By means of this item category, a sales order is created without any reference document. The system will create a sales
order and a delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible. If a third-party plant
is involved, a purchasing process will be posted first.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CSNO STANDARD XCS

Customer Sales: Without Documents


(only Sales Documents)

By means of this item category, a sales order is created without any reference document.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CSO STANDARD XCS

Customer Sales: Order RCS

Application Help for S4SCSD


144 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

By means of this item category, a delivery is created with reference to a sales order. The system will change the sales order
if necessary, generate a delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible. If a third-
party plant is involved, a purchasing process will be posted first.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

RCS STANDARD none

Return (Cancellation for Sales)

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category CSC, CSD, CSN or CSO. The system will generate a
returns order, a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. If the refered Data Collation item has created a billing, then a
billing will be posted. The refered Data Collation item will be marked as cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XCS STANDARD none

Cancellation for Sales

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category CSC, CSD, CSN or CSO. All movements previously
posted by means of these item categories will be cancelled. The delivery item will be deleted. If the item category refers to
CSC or CSN, the sales order will be rejected.

Carrier Loading

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CLC STANDARD XCL

Forwarding Agent Supply: Purchase


Contract

This item category is used for posting a carrier storage supply with reference to a purchase contract. The system will create
a purchase order and post a goods receipt. It is possible to use the purchase contract only to copy data into the Data Colla­
tion, so that the purchase order will be created without any reference. A Data Collation document of document cagtegory
FWDAGENT or VEHICLE can refer to this item as a loading by using item category LDC.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CLN STANDARD XCL

Forwarding Agent Supply: Purchase Or­


der

This item category is used for posting a carrier storage supply with reference to a purchase order. The system will change
the purchase order if necessary and post a goods receipt. A Data Collation document of document cagtegory FWDAGENT
or VEHICLE can refer to this item as a loading by using item category LDC.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 145
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CLO STANDARD XCL

Forwarding Agent Supply: Purchase Or­


der

This item category is used for posting a carrier storage supply with reference to a purchase order. The system will change
the purchase order if necessary and post a goods receipt. A Data Collation document of document cagtegory FWDAGENT
or VEHICLE can refer to this item as a loading by using item category LDC.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

CLP STANDARD XCLP

Forwarding Agent Supply: Own Storage

This item category is used for posting material movements from an own storage to a carrier's storage location without any
reference document. A Data Collation document of document cagtegory FWDAGENT or VEHICLE can refer to this item as a
loading by using item category LDC.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XCL STANDARD none

Cancellation for Forwarding Agent Sup­


ply

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category CLC, CLN or CLO. All movements previously posted
by means of these item categories will be cancelled. If the item category refers to CLC or CLN, the deletion indicator of the
purchase order item will be set.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XCLP STANDARD none

Cancellation for Forwarding Agent Sup­


ply (Own Storage)

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category CLP. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Storage Supply

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

RSC STANDARD XRS

Customer Sales: Return for the Sales


Contract

This item category is used for creating a returns order and a returns delivery with reference to a sales contract and for post­
ing the goods return delivery. It is possible to use the sales contract only to copy data into the Data Collation, so that the
returns order will be created without any reference. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Application Help for S4SCSD


146 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

RSO STANDARD XRS

Customer Sales: Return for the Sales


Order

This item category is used for creating a returns order with reference to a sales order. The system will generate a returns
order, a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

RSR STANDARD XRS

Customer Sales: Return

This item category is used for creating a returns delivery with reference to a returns order. The system will generate a re­
turns delivery and posts a goods receipt. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

SPC STANDARD XSP

Storage Supply: Purchase Contract

This item category is used for posting a storage supply with reference to a purchase contract. The system will create a pur­
chase order and post a goods receipt. It is possible to use the purchase contract only to copy data into the Data Collation,
so that the purchase order will be created without any reference.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

SPN STANDARD XSP

Storage Supply: Without Documents


(Purchase Order and GR)

This item category is used for posting a storage supply for a known supplier but without any reference document. The sys­
tem will create a purchase order and post a goods receipt.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

SPO STANDARD XSP

Storage Supply: Purchase Order

This item category is used for posting a storage supply with reference to a purchase order. The system will change the pur­
chase order if necessary and post a goods receipt.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XRS STANDARD none

Cancellation for Return

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category RSC, RSO or RSR. All movements previously
posted by means of these item categories will be cancelled. The returns delivery item will be deleted. If the item category
refers to RSC or RSO, the returns order will be rejected.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 147
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XSP STANDARD none

Cancellation for Storage Supply

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category SPC, SPN or SPO. All movements previously
posted by means of these item categories will be cancelled. If the item category refers to SPC or SPN, the deletion indicator
of the purchase order item will be set.

Stock Transfer

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

STN STANDARD XST

Storage Supply: Without Documents


(STO and GR)

Creates a stock transfer order and posts stock transfer with reference to this stock transfer order. If necessary a replenish­
ment delivery will be created.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

STO STANDARD XST

Storage Supply: Stock Transport Order

This item category is used for posting material to the stock in transit of the receiving plant. Optionally, a goods receipt will
be posted for the receiving plant. If necessary a replenishment delivery will be created.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

STU STANDARD XRS

Storage Supply (Stock Transport Order


Unrestricted-Use Stock)

This item category is used for posting a goods receipt by means of movement type 101 and with reference to an item cate­
gory STN or STO which has already been posted.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XST STANDARD none

Cancellation for Storage Supply (Stock


Transport Order)

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category STN or STO. All movements previously posted by
means of these item categories will be cancelled. If the item category refers to STN, the deletion indicator of the stock
transfer order item will be set.

Application Help for S4SCSD


148 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XSTU STANDARD none

Cancellation for Storage Supply (STO


Unrestricted-Use Stock)

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category STU. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Loading

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LDC FWDAGENT XLDC

Loading: Data Collation Document VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates a stock transfer from the carrier's storage location to the truck storage location with reference
to an item category CLC, CLN, CLO or CLP of an STANDARD Data Collation document. It may be generated manually or
automatically, for example by posting interface loading data originating from external dispatch systems.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LOS FWDAGENT XLO

Loading: Own Storage VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates the loading of a means of transport from an own storage without any reference document.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LPC FWDAGENT XLP

Loading: Purchase Contract VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates the loading of a means of transport from a third-party storage with reference to a purchase con­
tract. The system will generate a purchase order and post a goods receipt. It is possible to use the purchase contract only
to copy data into the Data Collation, so that the purchase order will be created without any reference.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LPN FWDAGENT XLP

Loading: Without Document VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates the loading of a means of transport from a third-party storage without any reference document.
The system will generate a purchase order and post a goods receipt.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 149
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LPO FWDAGENT XLP

Loading: Purchase Order VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates a loading from a third-party storage with reference to a purchase order. The system will change
the purchase order if necessary and post a goods receipt.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LRC FWDAGENT XLR

Loading: Return for the Sales Contract VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category is used for creating a loading of a means of transport with reference to a sales contract. The system will
generate a returns order, a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. It is possible to use the sales contract only to copy
data into the Data Collation, so that the returns order will be created without any reference. An optional posting of a billing
document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LRO FWDAGENT XLR

Loading: Return for the Sales Order VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category is used for creating a loading of a means of transport with reference to a sales order. The system will
generate a returns order, a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. An optional posting of a billing document is also pos­
sible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

LRR FWDAGENT XLR

Loading: Return VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category is used for creating a loading of a means of transport with reference to a returns order. The system will
generate a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XLDC FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Loading (Data Collation VEHICLE


Document)
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category LDC. All movements previously posted by menas of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Application Help for S4SCSD


150 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XLO FWDAGENT none

Loading Cancellation for Own Storage VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category LOS. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XLP FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Vendor Loading VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category LPC, LPN or LPO. All movements previously posted
by means of these item categories will be cancelled. If the item category refers to LPC or LPN, the deletion indicator of the
purchase order item will be set.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XLR FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Return Loading VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category LRC, LRO or LRR. All movements previously posted
by means of these item categories will be cancelled. The returns delivery item will be deleted. If the item category refers to
LRC or LRO, the returns order will be rejected.

Unloading

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

UOS FWDAGENT XUO

Unloading: Own Storage VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport to an own storage.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

USC FWDAGENT XUS

Unloading: Sales Contract VEHICLE RUS

IDMVEHICLE

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 151
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

This item category unloads a means of transport by refering to a sales contract. The system will create a sales order and a
delivery and post a goods issue. It is possible to use the sales contract only to copy data into the Data Collation, so that the
sales order will be created without any reference. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

USD FWDAGENT XUS

Unloading: Customer Delivery VEHICLE RUS

IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport by refering to a delivery. The system will change the original sales order
and delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

USN FWDAGENT XUS

Unloading: Without Document (Sales VEHICLE RUS


Order)
IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport by delivering it to a customer without any reference document. The sys­
tem will create a sales order and a delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possi­
ble.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

USO FWDAGENT XUS

Unloading: Sales Order VEHICLE RUS

IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport by refering to a sales order. The system will change the original sales order
if necessary, create a delivery and post a goods issue. An optional posting of a billing document is also possible.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

UST FWDAGENT XUST

Unloading: Stock Transport Order VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport to an own storage by refering to a stock tranfer order. The system will
create a goods receipt. If necessary a replenishment delivery will be created.

Application Help for S4SCSD


152 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

USTN FWDAGENT XUST

Unloading: Without Document (Stock VEHICLE


Transport Order)
IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport to an own storage. A stock transport order is created and a goods issue is
posted with reference to this. If necessary a replenishment delivery will be created.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

RUS FWDAGENT none

Return (Cancellation for Unloading) VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category LRC, LRO or LRR. The system will generate a re­
turns order, a returns delivery and posts a goods receipt. If the refered Data Collation item has created a billing, then a bill­
ing will be posted. The refered Data Collation item will be marked as canceled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XUO FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Own Storage Unload­ VEHICLE


ing
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category UOS. All movements previously posted by menas of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XUS FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Unloadig at Customer VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category USC, USD, USN or USO. All movements previously
posted by means of these item categories will be cancelled. The delivery item will be deleted. If the item category refers to
USC or USN, the sales order will be rejected.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XUST FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Unloading (Stock VEHICLE


Transport Order)
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category UST or USTN. All movements previously posted by
means of these item categories will be cancelled. If the item category refers to USTN, the deletion indicator of the stcok
transfer order item will be set.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 153
Internal Postings

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

VDG FWDAGENT XVDG

Difference Quantity Gain VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates a quantity difference posting for a quantity gain. The quantity to be posted will be proposed by
the system with the aim to adjust vehicle stocks to zero.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

VDL FWDAGENT XVDL

Difference Quantity Loss VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

This item category creates a quantity difference posting for a quantity loss. The quantity to be posted will be proposed by
the system with the aim to adjust vehicle stocks to zero.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

VFL FWDAGENT none

Internal Flushing VEHICLE

IDMVEHICLE

Internal Truck Flushing: In case of a change of material in a means of transport, remaining quantities are posted to another
tank via stock transfer by using this item category.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

VLB FWDAGENT XVLB

Remaining Quantity at the End of the VEHICLE


Tour
IDMVEHICLE

This item category unloads a means of transport to the remaining quantities storage. By unloading the left-on-vehicle quan­
tities, the stock of the means of transport will be adjusted to zero. If no remaining quantity storage is assigned to the vehi­
cle, then the goods remains in the vehicle stock and the system considers this in the quantity check. The next Data Colla­
tion document, which uses this vehicle has to begin with item category VPL.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

VPL FWDAGENT XVPL

Remaining Quantity at the Beginning of VEHICLE


the Tour
IDMVEHICLE

Application Help for S4SCSD


154 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

This item category creates the loading of a means of transport from the remaining quantities storage. If no remaining quan­
tity storage is assigned to the vehicle, then the goods are already in the vehicle stock and the system considers this in the
quantity check. The previous Data Collation document, which uses this vehicle has to begin with item category VLB.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XVDG FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Difference Quantity VEHICLE


Gain
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category VDG. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XVDL FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Difference Quantity VEHICLE


Loss
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category VDL. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XVLB FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Remaining Quantity at VEHICLE


the End of the Tour
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category VLB. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Item Category Used for Document Categories To be Cancelled by Item Categories

XVPL FWDAGENT none

Cancellation for Remaining Quantity at VEHICLE


the Beginning of the Tour
IDMVEHICLE

This item category always refers to a successfully posted item category VPL. All movements previously posted by means of
these item categories will be cancelled.

Related Information

Data Collation (DC) [page 125]


Document Category [page 128]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 155
Item Category [page 128]
Trip-Related Data Collation [page 224]

5.10 Statuses in Data Collation

Shows the statuses of documents and items in Data Collation (DC).

Document Statuses in DC

The following table shows the different Data Collation (DC) document statuses:

Document Status Meaning

A In Process

B Checked

C Released

D Partly Posted

E Partly Posted (Locks Exist)

F Posted

G Deactivated

H Canceled

You define the document statuses in Customizing for S4SCSD under Data Collation (DC) Process
Automation Toolset (PAT) Document Define Document Status for application DC.

Item Statuses in DC

The following table shows the different item statuses of Data Collation (DC):

Item Status Meaning

A New

B Partly Posted

Application Help for S4SCSD


156 PUBLIC Data Collation (DC)
Item Status Meaning

C Posted

D Deactivated

E Excluded

F Canceled

You define the item statuses as values for the domain Item Status /PAT/ITEM_STATUS.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Collation (DC) PUBLIC 157
6 Interfaces (IF)

Purpose

This component enables the import of data to the SAP system using configurable ALE inbound function
modules, including their automatic and manual processing in the Interface Monitor. You can archive the
interface documents.

The data can be generated by SAP systems or other systems.

Any file types and structures can be processed.

The data is processed using methods that can be tailored to meet the customer's individual needs.

The following figure illustrates the further processing of an interface document:

Related Information

Interface Monitor [page 159]


Archiving Interface Documents Using /ICO/OOIF [page 231]

Application Help for S4SCSD


158 PUBLIC Interfaces (IF)
6.1 Interface Monitor

Use

You can use the interface monitor to display all the processes of object-oriented S4SCSD interfaces that run
when incoming data is imported and processed.

In the locator on the IF tab page (interfaces), you can search for interface documents and display them in a list.
By double-clicking on an interface document, you can display its log data, the table structure, and the
document flow. By double-clicking on an entry in the log data or table structure, a detail view for those entries
is displayed in the data area. By double-clicking on an entry in the document flow, you open a document in its
respective transaction.

Interface documents with status A can be processed in the detail view.

In the locator on the Find IDoc tab page, you can search for IDocs and display them in a list. By double-clicking
on an IDoc, you open it in the standard IDoc display.

To display interface documents that belong to an IDoc, select an entry in the list and choose Display Interface
Documents.

Features

Check

If you have made the appropriate settings in Customizing for Interfaces under General Settings Define
Incompleteness Procedure and Define Field Groups, the imported files undergo an incompleteness control
(ICC).

Simulation

The system simulates how subsequent processing will run without creating any documents, if subsequent
processing allows for a simulation.

Subsequent Processing

This starts subsequent processing that is defined by the method.

Post

If it was not completely successful, subsequent processing defined by the method is restarted.

6.2 Copying Files

Use

This function enables you to copy interface files from SAP directories to PC directories and vice versa.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Interfaces (IF) PUBLIC 159
Activities

File Download

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Interfaces Environment File Download .
2. Enter the data source as SAP Directory and enter a Source File Name.
3. Enter the data target as PC Directory and enter a Target File Name.
4. Choose Execute.

File Upload

1. On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP
Menu Interfaces Environment File Upload .
2. Enter the data source as PC Directory and enter a Source File Name.
3. Enter the data target as SAP Directory and enter a Target File Name.
4. Choose Execute.

 Caution

The directories must comply with the PC or UNIX standard and must end with a forward slash or
backslash.

6.3 Web Interface Cockpit

Use

Different information about the interfaces is displayed in the Web Interface Cockpit.

Prerequisites

In Customizing for Interfaces, under Interface Control Define Interface , you have entered a value in the
Direction column.

Activities

On the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution screen, choose SAP Menu
Interfaces Web Interface Cockpit . The Web Interface Cockpit screen appears.

Locator

Application Help for S4SCSD


160 PUBLIC Interfaces (IF)
Enter the search criteria and choose Find.

The receipt interfaces found are displayed in a table. The number of documents found is displayed in the upper
area. To view the issue interfaces, choose Issue. To view the results list as a chart, choose . The number of
notifications per day is displayed for each notification category. The period is determined by the selection in
the locator. You cannot make settings for the chart.

Select an interface. The interface documents and further details are displayed on the right.

 Note

You can set the locator in Customizing.

IF Document Status

You can select one or more statuses and choose to determine which status or statuses are displayed in the
Interface Documents area.

The number of documents found is displayed with this status or these statuses in the upper area.

Additional Data

● Interval
You can define document intervals. A document interval indicates how many documents are expected in a
particular time period. If the actual number of documents differs significantly from the expected number of
documents, this may be due to an error.
● Role
You can add roles to the interface and change roles. For example, you can see which person is responsible
for which function.
● Documentation
You can attach any external documents and create documentation for the interface.

Related Information

Locator [page 168]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Interfaces (IF) PUBLIC 161
7 Process Automation Toolset (PAT)

Use

This function enables posting processes to be executed automatically on the basis of an underlying document
known as the PAT document. A posting process can include the generation of follow-on documents such as
standard orders or deliveries.

PAT is based on Floor Plan Manager (FPM) and the Model View Controller (MVC) concept.

Features

A PAT application is identified by an S4SCSD application. Therefore, the S4SCSD application must be entered
for every Customizing setting in PAT. PAT is divided into the areas Processes and User Interface. In the Process
area, the objects Document Type and Item Type are used. The document type is assigned a document schema,
which defines the tables of the PAT document. The item type is assigned a posting profile, which defines the
documents to be posted. Document type and item type have an n:m relationship. In the User Interface area, the
objects Document Category and Item Category are used. The document type has a 1:n relationship with the
document category. The item type has a 1:n relationship with the item category.

The following figure illustrates the situation described above:

Application Help for S4SCSD


162 PUBLIC Process Automation Toolset (PAT)
The following are some of the processes that can be controlled by PAT:

● Document data management


A document type is assigned a document schema. Each PAT document must contain at least one header
table and one item table in the document schema. The document schema contains the following objects:
○ Document class: The PAT applications use a document class, which inherits from the general PAT
document class. Almost all documents are stored as data records in tables. These data records are
available as attributes in the document classes.
○ Change documents: Every change is documented.
○ Archiving class: Enables archived documents to be displayed.
○ Movement data
You can choose whether the document schema of the PAT document is referenced in the S4SCSD
interfaces. In this case, inbound IDocs are not stored temporarily in an interface document, they are
written to the PAT document directly.
The following figure illustrates the structure of the document schema described above:

● Document data supplementation


Often, the existing data is not as complete as is necessary. Supplementation schemas are used to
supplement the data. The event methods required for this are created in the method editor and assigned
to supplementation schemas.
Reference objects can be used to transfer existing data.
The quantity of data that needs to be entered manually is reduced.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) PUBLIC 163
The following figure illustrates the structure of the document data supplementation:

The document type controls the document schema and the supplementation schema for the header. The
item type controls the supplementation schema for the item. In the document schema, the reference
object type controls which data is supplemented. In the supplementation schemas, an event method
controls which data is supplemented.
● Checks
○ Incompleteness control (ICC): Checks required entry fields and is triggered manually.
○ Value checks: Checks input errors directly after entry.
○ Reference objects: Used for ICC and value checks. Serves as a general check if they are assigned to a
document table directly. Serves as a process check if they are assigned to an item type dynamically.

Application Help for S4SCSD


164 PUBLIC Process Automation Toolset (PAT)
The following figure illustrates the process of the checks outlined above:

● Posting control
The posting process can be performed for released, individual documents, or as a mass posting.
One or more process schemas can be determined from the posting profile for the document type. The
schemas are executed when certain prerequisites have been fulfilled.
A process schema is composed of one or more process rules. A process rule defines individual posting
steps, which are available as methods for the event Post.
Posting methods map the document data to input structures and tables of the BAPIs called.
The BAPI displays messages for new or changed documents. The messages are written to a log,
documents are mapped in the document flow.
The message type of the BAPI then causes the status of the PAT document to be set.
● Mapping
Mapping is used in the document data supplementation and in the posting process.
Generally, the process is as you defined in Customizing. During the posting process, data from data
records of the PAT documents is sent to the required input parameters of BAPIs. During document data
supplementation, the BAPI reads the data, for example, sales order data, and sends it to the PAT document
tables.
Mapping can be static; source field and target field are known. Or it can be dynamic, using event methods.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) PUBLIC 165
The following figure illustrates the mapping structure:

The reference object type and the process rule control the mapping schema that contains various mapping
groups.
● Data control
Ensures that all relevant data is displayed for the selected PAT document. It is composed of the following
sections:
○ Header data
Controlled by the document category.
○ Item data
Controlled by the document category (and the item category).
○ Details
Controlled by the item category.
Each section can include as many tab pages as required. In Customizing, you can use methods to
configure which tab pages are to be displayed. The appearance of each section is determined by variants,
which are defined in the FPM configuration editor. You can create new variants, or change existing ones
without modification.
● Logging
On posting, messages are generated, which are displayed. In the Log Structure area, a node with subnodes
is displayed for each activity, for example, delivery and invoice. When a node or subnode is selected, the
related messages are displayed in the Log Messages area.
In Customizing for PAT, under Dialog Priority of the Messages in the Log , you can configure which
notifications are to be displayed with which priority.
● Document flow

Application Help for S4SCSD


166 PUBLIC Process Automation Toolset (PAT)
All documents in a tree structure that are involved in the posting process for the selected PAT document
are displayed. You can set whether you want to see all documents, or only the predecessor documents or
successor documents.
If navigation is configured for a document category, you can display the document. Navigation is via the
SAP launchpad and can be configured in Customizing for PAT, under Dialog Define Navigation .
● Post Processing Framework (PPF)
Enables actions to be executed after posting if certain conditions are met, such as sending an e-mail,
starting a BAdI, or sending an IDoc. The actions are executed by event methods each time posting is saved.
The following figure illustrates the PPF options:

 Note

PAT can only be configured by a developer.

Integration

PAT is used in SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD) as a framework for Retail Fuel
Network Operations (RFNO) and Data Collation.

Prerequisites

You have configured the necessary settings in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Process Automation Toolset
(PAT).

Application Help for S4SCSD


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) PUBLIC 167
Related Information

Data Collation (DC) [page 125]


SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution (S4SCSD) [page 6]
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]

7.1 Locator

Use

In the locator, you can use search criteria to find objects, which are then displayed in a results list. In the results
list, you select one or more objects. The data for the object is then displayed in various detail areas.

After searching, you can hide the locator to make more space to display the data for the object.

You can configure the appearance of the locator in Customizing. This is generally controlled by a locator
schema. In the Network Operations Desk (NODe), this is done using the locator ID.

Integration

The locator is used in the following applications:

● In data collation
○ Start Data Collation
○ Start Standard Data Collation
○ Start Forwarding-Agent-Related Data Collation
○ Start Vehicle-Related Data Collation
● In Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
○ Start Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR)
○ Start RFNO Inbound Monitor
○ Start Network Operations Desk (NODe)
○ Edit location document
○ Edit clearing house document
○ Edit payment card contract document

● In the interfaces
○ Web Interface Cockpit

Activities

Define Locator Schema

Application Help for S4SCSD


168 PUBLIC Process Automation Toolset (PAT)
In Customizing for Process Automation Toolset (PAT), under Dialog Define Locator Schema , define a
locator schema. You define in which table the data is to be searched for and which selection method is to be
used. You define a method in the Customizing activity Edit Event Methods of the PAT, in the menu under
Dialog Selection . You define a field catalog for the locator schema, and determine which search criteria
are to be excluded.

You assign the locator schema to a document category.

Assign Locator Schema to Document Category

In Customizing for PAT, under Dialog Define Document Categories , you assign the locator schema to a
document category.

Define Locator ID for the NODe

In Customizing for Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO), under Network Operations Desk (NODe) Define
Locator , you define a locator ID. You define in which table the data is to be searched for and which selection
method is to be used. You define a method in the Customizing activity Edit Event Methods of RFNO, in the menu
under NODe Monitor Locator Data Selection . For the locator ID, you define a tree structure for the
results list.

The locator IDs are displayed in alphabetical order in the NODe according to the technical name.

 Note

The locator used in Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) for editing CSR locations and for CSR
analysis cannot be changed in Customizing by means of a schema. It cannot be changed.

Related Information

Web Interface Cockpit [page 160]


Data Collation (DC) [page 125]
Processing Documents [page 82]
Creating and Posting a Data Collation Document [page 129]
Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]
Network Operations Desk (NODe) [page 100]
Interfaces (IF) [page 158]
RFNO Inbound Monitor (RIM) [page 72]
Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR) [page 105]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Process Automation Toolset (PAT) PUBLIC 169
8 Integrated Dispatch Management
(S4IDM)

Allows you to schedule and monitor outbound delivery tours.

Use

IDM comprises Trip Planning with its master data maintenance and various administration tools.

In Trip Planning, you compile your outbound delivery tours by dragging objects and with graphical support.

You can also archive the IDM data.

 Note

IDM is currently only possible in an SAP Fiori Launchpad. With components S4SCSD 200 and an SAP Fiori
front-end server with UIS4SCSD 200 on the same server. See also SAP Note 2392559 . The application
is not available in the SAP menu for S4SCSD.

Integration

Data Retrieval

When IDM is started, the Customizing settings and master data are first communicated to Trip Planning. This is
followed by the movement data, such as sales orders, contracts, and stock levels of your own storage. The
following figure shows the data retrieval process when IDM is started:

The sales order data is written to the IDM message control table /BTL/TR_NAST by a report controlled by a job
that uses message control (message type OG01 and access sequence OGTP).

The contracts and stock levels in the user's own storage are also written to IDM message control table /BTL/
TR_NAST by a report controlled by a job. Contracts and stock levels in the user's own storage are only taken
into account if the corresponding contracts are assigned to a plant that you have assigned to the role IDM
Plant/Storage Location (RNBPL) in transaction BP.

The data in table /BTL/TR_NAST is used as the basis for trip creation.

 Note

Every action taken during trip planning is saved automatically. You do not need to perform a manual action
for this.

Application Help for S4SCSD


170 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Interface
The following figure illustrates the interface with the communication of the services:

The dispatchers work on the user interface using an Internet browser and create the trips. A request is sent via
HTTPS to the geographical services for displaying the road map. An additional request is sent to the Internet
Communication Framework (ICF). The ICF sends a request to create the coordinates and the route via RFC to
the geographical service.

The ICF sends a request to the SAP Gateway. The SAP Gateway sends a request to S4IDM via oData. The data
is mapped and processed further. Authorizations are checked against the master data. The system then
processes the data. The system sends a message to the ABAP push channel (APC). The ACP sends a GUID to
the ICF.

The following table outlines the services that are executed on the xServer:

xServer Services

Service Meaning

xMAP Displays the road map.

xLOCATE Returns the coordinates based on the address.

xROUTE Shows the route based on the coordinates on the road map.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 171
Correlations
The following figure illustrates the correlation of specific objects and the locations of creation and assignment:

The following figure illustrates the correlation of MPGI and MPGI groups:

Application Help for S4SCSD


172 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
The colors in the figures above specify the location of creation or assignment. The following table outlines the
correlation in more detail:

Color Assignments

Color Location of creation or assignment

Blue The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Administration or


Master Data

The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Administration

Create Dispatcher

The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Master Data Assign

Material to Material Planning Group Indicator

The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Master Data Edit

Business Partner

Light blue Transaction MM01

Black Customizing under S4SCSD S4IDM Trip Planning

Trip and Item Categories and Delivery Zones Define

Delivery Zones

Pink Customizing under S4SCSD S4IDM Trip Planning

General Settings Define Material Planning Group

Indicators

Red The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Master Data Edit


Business Partner BP in the respective IDM role

Green The S4SCSD menu under S4IDM Master Data


Equipment and Transport Units Create Equipment IE01

You can assign a dispatcher to multiple top delivery zones. The dispatcher can only work in one TDZ of a top
delivery zone group in Trip Planning, however.

You assign a TU to a TDZ using a vehicle depot.

Select a TDZ for the driver and then assign a VD. The driver is therefore assigned to this TDZ. Only now is it
possible to make the assignment to a TU. You can assign the driver at least one TU with a tractor as a default
TU and also default equipment. You can assign further TUs without a tractor to the driver.

The following table explains the abbreviations used:

Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning

MPGI Material planning group indicator

DZG Delivery zone group

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 173
Abbreviation Meaning

TDZ Top delivery zone

DZ* Delivery Zone

TU Transport unit

VD Vehicle depot

There can be any number of delivery zones between the TDZ and the lowest DZ. However, assignments are
always made from the TDZ or the lowest DZ.

You can assign a vehicle depot only to delivery zones that are assigned to the same TDZ. The vehicle depot is
then locked for other assignments.

Related Information

Trip Planning (TP) [page 174]


Plant and Contract Determination [page 211]
Mixed Products [page 213]
Delivery Zone [page 207]
Road Map [page 184]
Archive IDM Data with /BTL/ARC [page 242]

8.1 Trip Planning (TP)

Makes it possible to compile the outbound delivery tours.

Use

You can use the graphical support and the drag and drop function to compile your outbound delivery tours. You
can assign a dispatcher different responsibilities. Various functions support you in the creation of tours. The
trip category controls the creation of trips.

 Note

We recommend that only one user logs on at each workstation. Otherwise, the data may be inconsistent.

Application Help for S4SCSD


174 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Features

In the toolbar, you can find information on the used versions of the components, under Version Information.

Trip Planning includes the following functions:

● Road map
● Document overview
● Gantt chart
● Resource list
● Vehicle chart
● Multi-function
● Change start variant

These functions are displayed in separate areas:

● Road map
● Document overview
● Gantt chart with the views pane
● Resource list
● Vehicle chart

You can change the size of the individual areas.

You can display a tooltip for various objects with a mouse-over, or by clicking on them. You can change the
tooltip in Customizing for S4IDM under Trip Planning Text Information . This text information is displayed
on the road map for plants and items, for example. The Gantt chart contains text information, for example, for
trips and for drivers. You can configure the font size in Customizing, under Integrated Dispatch Management
(S4IDM) Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups , under Font Size in the Tooltip for IDM in
PercentQUICKINFO_FONTSIZE.

The latest messages are displayed directly in the header bar. For an overview of all messages, see All Messages
.

If there are changes, a field with a bell  and the number of changes is displayed in the header bar. Click the
arrow and choose Apply Changes. This copies the changes to the road map.

 Caution

Note that both the tooltip and the context menu always display the current status in the database and can
therefore differ from the interface display. To get the current status, always choose the bell icon.

You can configure an automatic update in Customizing, under Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups , under Update Delay for the IDM
InterfaceUPDATE_DELAY.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 175
Prerequisites

General

Following the installation, you must execute the report /BTL/TR_NAST_PLANT_DATA for each top delivery
zone; otherwise, no loadings can be performed.

You have assigned the business role SAP_BR_TRANSPORTPLANNER_SCSD to the Fiori Launchpad.

Choose the app Integrated Dispatch Management in the Fiori app library. The app has the Fiori ID F4094.

Master data

In the SAP Menu, under S4SCSD S4IDM Administration Create Dispatcher , you have created the
dispatcher and defined the assignments. You can assign complete top delivery zones as well as only
subdelivery zones. You can use up to five delivery zone levels.

You can also use the Fiori App Assign DispatcherF4164.

You can enable a dispatcher to log onto Trip Planning from different systems at the same time. You need to
configure it in transaction STRUSTSSO2Trust Manager for Single Sign-On with Logon Ticket .

In the SAP Menu, you need to assign a material to an MPGI under S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Assign
Material to Material Planning Group Indicator .

You assign the MPGI to the delivery zone in the Customizing for S4IDM under Trip Planning Trip and Item
Categories and Delivery Zones Define Delivery Zones .

The prerequisite is that you have defined the MPGI in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning
General Settings Define Material Planning Group Indicators .

Master data is subject to a usage check. If master data is used in a trip, no changes can be made. Only the time
allocation of vehicles to the business partner Vehicle Depot can be changed.

S4IDM Customizing

You have configured the required settings in Customizing for S4IDM.

You have configured the number ranges in Customizing for S4IDM under Trip Planning Trip and Item
Categories and Delivery Zones Number Ranges .

Menu

You have configured the /BTL/IDM_ALL area menu.

Web browser

Use the latest version of the Google Chrome web browser.

Application Help for S4SCSD


176 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Activities

The items, plants, and vehicle depots to be planned are displayed on a road map in the application. You need to
drag the items to be planned to a driver or transport unit in a Gantt chart. That is how you create the outbound
delivery tours. During this process, the system checks various parameters such as when the driver is available.

Related Information

Road Map [page 184]


Document Overview [page 191]
Gantt chart [page 193]
Resources [page 200]
Detail View [page 203]
Vehicle Chart [page 200]
Multi-Function [page 205]
Change Start Variants [page 206]
Assign Dispatcher (App) [page 177]
https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com

8.1.1 Assign Dispatcher (App)

You can use this app to assign the delivery zones to trip planning dispatchers. The app has the Fiori ID F4164.

Features

This app provides the following key features:

● Find user
You can search by the following criteria:
○ User name
○ First name
○ Last name
● Displaying delivery zones and assignments
The delivery zones are displayed in a structure. Existing assignments are highlighted in color.
● Assigning users to the delivery zones
Assign the user to one or more delivery zones. To do so, select the relevant checkboxes.
● Copying assignments
Choose Copy to assign the current assignments to another user.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 177
Fiori Launchpad (PLP)

In FLP, you need to select this role to get the app:

● SAP_BR_TRANSPORTPLANNER_SCSD

Supported Device Types

● Desktop
● Tablet
● Smartphone

Dependencies

In the SAP Menu for S4SCSD, under Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Administration Create
Dispatcher you can also create and assign dispatchers.

8.1.2 Start Variants

Determines which objects can be displayed in Trip Planning.

Use

Before you start Trip Planning for the first time, you define the parameters that you want to work with. You can
save these parameters as a variant. When you execute Trip Planning, some parameters can also be changed
during runtime. You can do this using the function Start Variants in Trip Planning.

Activities

Months
Select a validity period for which the unplanned items are to be displayed on the road map. The dates refer to
order dates. This period also limits the days displayed in the Gantt chart and in the grid.

You can stipulate a maximum planning period in Customizing under S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and Item
Categories and Delivery Zones Define Trip Category in the detail screen of the trip category. This
Customizing setting also limits the days displayed in the Gantt chart and in the lists of contracts.

Application Help for S4SCSD


178 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Delivery Zones
Select the delivery zones.

Only the delivery zones are displayed that you assigned in the master data under Create Dispatcher.

Variant

You can save your selected settings as a variant by choosing the Select View  pushbutton. The dialog box My
Views appears.

Choose the Save as pushbutton. Enter an ID and a name for the variant. The name is language-dependent. If
the logon language is not the language in which the name was created, no name is displayed.

If you want to start Trip Planning using this variant, select Start Immediately. The next time you start trip
planning, the system takes you directly to Trip Planning with these parameters.

You can use the Manage pushbutton to edit existing variants. The Manage Views dialog box appears. Here you
can also delete selected variants.

Change Parameters
You can change the parameters of the current Trip Planning. Choose in the toolbar Start Variants in Trip
Planning.

Related Information

Change Start Variants [page 206]


Document Overview [page 191]
Gantt chart [page 193]

8.1.3 Processing Trips

You can create, move, and delete trips in Trip Planning.

You can use Trip Planning to edit the trips in these manners:

● Create a trip
○ By dragging an item from the road map to the Gantt chart.
○ By dragging an item from the list of contracts to the Gantt chart.
● Move a trip
○ Vertically within the Gantt chart
○ Horizontally within the Gantt chart
○ Assign a trip to another trip
● Delete a trip
○ During planning by dragging the item back onto the road map.
○ Delete a trip that has already been planned using the report Delete Planned Trips.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 179
Related Information

Deleting Planned Trips [page 182]

8.1.3.1 Create Trip from Within the Road Map

Describes how you can create a trip from the road map in the Gantt chart.

Context

During creation from within the road map, the vehicle depot and the loading plant are automatically assigned.
The vehicle depot depends on the vehicle. The loading plant depends on the sales order or on the plant and
contract determination.

You can also delete a vehicle depot that was assigned automatically and drag the road map to add a different
one.

Use the connection tool on the road map when you want to assign another vehicle depot or plant to the trip.
Select the vehicle depot, item or items, and plant. Drag this group to the Gantt chart.

Procedure

Drag an item from the road map to the Gantt chart.

Related Information

Plant and Contract Determination [page 211]

8.1.3.2 Create Trip from Document Overview

Describes how you can create a trip from within the document overview in the Gantt chart

Context

Application Help for S4SCSD


180 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Procedure

Drag an entry from a document overview to the Gantt chart.


a. From within the unloading documents. Only documents not blocked can be dragged.
b. From within the loading documents. When you release the document in the Gantt chart, the dialog box
Create Loading is displayed. Enter the quantity to be loaded. Choose Send. Delete the previously existing
loading item from the trip.

Activate the option Display Cursor Line in the Settings. If you press a button when dragging a document, an
activated cursor line appears in the Gantt chart at defined minute intervals. If you do not press a button or have
not chosen the option Display Cursor Line, you can position the document anywhere.

Keys
Key Minute Interval

Shift 10

Control key or AltGr 15

Alt 30

Related Information

Settings [page 199]


Document Overview [page 191]

8.1.3.3 Move a Trip Vertically

Describes how to move a trip vertically within the Gantt chart.

Context

If you have selected the driver view, you can assign a different trip to a driver. If you have chosen the transport
unit view, you can assign the trip to a different transport unit.

Procedure

Drag the trip to a different driver or to another freight unit.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 181
8.1.3.4 Move a Trip Horizontally

Describes how to move a trip horizontally within the Gantt chart.

Context

You can move a trip horizontally on the time axis.

Procedure

Drag a trip to the new item.

8.1.3.5 Assign Trip to Another Trip

Describes how you can assign one trip to another.

Procedure

1. Drag one trip to another trip.


2. Release the trip at the required position. A quick info displays the position. A blue marker displays the
exact position.

8.1.3.6 Deleting Planned Trips

This report lets you delete a planned trip in Trip Planning.

Use

You can use this report to delete planned trips for the current top delivery zone (TDZ) in Trip Planning. You can
do this for the older trips that are no longer required, for example. We recommend that you execute this report
at regular intervals.

You can find the report in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Administration Delete Planned Trips .

Application Help for S4SCSD


182 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Prerequisites

You can delete the trips only if no other dispatcher is processing this TDZ. All dispatchers must therefore close
the Trip Planning.

You can delete trips that are still required, for example, due to a loading reference to the trip in Trip Planning,
only if you also delete the dependent trips.

Activities

You must have at least the trip category and can select additional search criteria.

You can also control the behavior during deletion. If you do not select an indicator, the documents in the Gantt
chart are deleted. However, the documents are available on the street map for planning again.

The system displays a list of the trips found. Select the trips to be deleted. Choose Delete Trips.

8.1.4 Features

Describes the available functions that help you plan trips.

The following functions are available:

● Display Road Map


● Display Document Overview
● Display Gantt Chart
● Display Resource List
● Display Vehicle View
● Execute Multi-Function
● Change Start Variant

Related Information

Road Map [page 184]


Document Overview [page 191]
Gantt chart [page 193]
Resources [page 200]
Vehicle Chart [page 200]
Multi-Function [page 205]
Change Start Variants [page 206]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 183
8.1.4.1 Road Map

Describes the functions of the road map for trip planning.

Use

On the road map, the route and various objects are indicated by symbols. The objects that are located in the
delivery zone that you selected in the start parameters are displayed. You compile your trips by dragging
objects to the Gantt chart.

Various functions are available for selecting the objects and working with the road map.

The road map is located in the toolbar, under Display Map .

Prerequisites

A sample implementation is delivered from the PTV AG for the xServer. Map material from the companies
Navteq and TeleAtlas is supported.

You can use this sample implementation as a template for other implementations. In general, you can use road
maps by implementing BAdIs that address the required functions of an external geo-service layer. See also SAP
Note 2872120 .

Features

Symbols
The following objects can be displayed:

● Items of sales orders


● Plants or storage locations
● Vehicle depots
● Vehicle Live Tracking

You can configure the symbols in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Symbols Define
Symbol Schema Group . This affects these parameters, for instance:

● Color
● Shape
● Positioning
● Graphic to be displayed

The trip that you are currently processing in the Gantt chart is displayed and highlighted on the road map. The
background of the objects that are relevant for the trip is colored. The objects are linked with the route. This is
indicated by a colored line.

Application Help for S4SCSD


184 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Item

The following table outlines the possible forms of items:

Item Display Options


Where How What

Basis Color Material number

Inner area Shape Quantity area

Number Remaining time until outbound delivery

Red number: Date is in the past

Attached shape upper left Color gray Planned item

Color red Unplanned item

Attached shape upper right Number Priority of item

Attached shape lower right Changed item


yellow marking

New item
green marking

Deleted item
red marking

Delivery priority

During order creation, you set the delivery priority of the item in the Item Priority field of the Shipping group box
on the Item Detail tab page. If you do not enter a value here, IDM applies 50 as the priority.

The following table outlines this priority conversion:

Delivery Priority
Priority in Order Creation Level Priority in IDM

001 Highest 0

000 Medium 50

100 Lowest 99

If the priority calculated is greater than 99, a priority of 99 is always used in IDM.

The number of days until the outbound delivery is also taken into account when calculating the priority in IDM.
The fewer the days remaining, the higher the priority that is set. The priority is calculated according to the
following formula: (priority in VA01/10) * number of days * 2

If the priority in VA01 is 000, a priority of 50 is always used for the calculation in IDM.

The following table provides examples of calculations for the priority:

Calculating the Priority

Days Until Outbound Delivery (Max.


Priority in VA01 255 Days) Priority in IDM

50 4

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 185
Days Until Outbound Delivery (Max.
Priority in VA01 255 Days) Priority in IDM

50 2 40

60 0 20

100 10 0

000 (80 is used in calculation) 3 99 (however, calculated value is 200)

6 5 30

The item priority is also displayed in the document overview. You can change this if needed in the Settings for
the documents.

Group Symbol
If there are a number of items for a ship-to-party, the number of items is displayed on the symbol.

If you click on the group symbol, the individual items are displayed arranged in a circle. If you click the symbol
again, the previous symbol is displayed.

Depending on the zoom level, the individual items are displayed in a list.

Text Information
When you mouseover, text information for the object is displayed. You can configure the text information in
Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Text Information .

Context Menu
In the context menu, you can perform various actions for an object. You can configure the actions in
Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Actions and Context Menu .

● Item
○ Item Data Changes
For more information, see the section on transferring a change.

Route
You can display the route for a trip in a number of different ways.

● Road Map
Double-click the planned item.
● Gantt chart
Click on the header level of a trip.

 Note

You can also display the route between the objects as a beeline. To do so, choose the following in
Customizing for S4SCSD: S4IDM Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups . Enter the
value X for the field name USE_BEELINEUse Beelines Instead of Routes.

Application Help for S4SCSD


186 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Navigation

An application toolbar is available in the upper left corner. Quick infos are displayed for the corresponding
functions.

The following table outlines the application toolbar functions:

Toolbar Functions
Name Symbol Meaning

Zoom Out  It makes the map section on the road


map smaller.

You can also use the zoom slider on the


map or use the mouse scroll wheel.

Zoom In  It makes the map section on the road


map larger.

You can also use the zoom slider on the


map or use the mouse scroll wheel.

Zoom Center  The road map zooms so that all items


are displayed.

Select Zoom Area Selects the area which is displayed –


centered and zoomed.

Standard Tool  For selecting the symbols.

Rectangle Tool Draws a rectangular frame around sym­


bols.

Lasso Tool Draws an irregular frame around sym­


bols.

Point-to-Point Tool  For selecting individual symbols.

Number Shows the number of currently se­


lected items.

Vehicle Tracking Displays Vehicle Live Tracking.

The following table outlines the functions on the road map:

Functions on the Road Map


Name Meaning

Move Map Moves the map in the corresponding direction. The red ar­
row points in the direction north. By double-clicking on the
middle, you can go back to the initial item.

Zoom Slider Changes the zoom in the corresponding size. You can also
zoom using the mouse wheel.

Status Display for Items

The item totals are displayed in the upper-right corner of the road map:

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 187
● All Total of all scheduled and unplanned items without changed, new, and deleted items
● Planned items
● Unplanned items

Totals of items with a status are also displayed. However, that happens only if a corresponding status exists:

● Deleted: Deleted items


Only if the item was already planned and has been deleted is this item displayed as deleted. Immediately
after they are deleted, unplanned items are no longer counted.

 Caution

Only deleted items are displayed. If you delete an order that contains items, these items are not
displayed as deleted. The reason for this is that this display is controlled by message control. However,
message control only works at item level.

● New: New items


● Changed: Changed items

Remaining: All items minus the sum of changed, new, and deleted items

On the road map, the new, changed, and deleted items are displayed as follows:

● Changed items: Document with yellow triangle on the item


● New item: Document with green square on the item
● Deleted item: Document with a red circle on the item

All display areas except for All are also buttons. If the area is dark, these items are displayed. If the area is light,
these items are not displayed. If you switch off an area, the filter function  is displayed.

Scale layer

The scale layer in the lower left corner corresponds to the currently selected zoom level. You configure the unit
of measurement in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Geographical Services Define Technical Parameters for Map Services . In the Unit of Measurement column,
choose the unit of length for the relevant group.

The following table shows the possible units of length:

Units of Length

Metric Units Anglo-American Units

Kilometer km Mile mi

Meter m Yard yd

Related Information

Editing Symbols [page 189]


Vehicle Live Tracking [page 190]

Application Help for S4SCSD


188 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
8.1.4.1.1 Editing Symbols

Describes which settings are necessary so you can add your own fields to a symbol schema.

Context

To display the your own fields for visualizing the IDM documents on the road map for Trip Planning, you must
enhance the symbol schema.

If you only want to change existing symbols in the visualization, follow steps 1 to 7 as described under B.

The following steps are necessary to create a new symbol:

● A. Extend the structure


● B. Adjust the symbol schema
● C. Assign the symbol schema

A. Extend the structure

1. Open the structure /BTL/TRS_WDC_IDMDOC in the transaction ABAP DictionarySE11 in the display view.
Add an append structure to it. Activate the structure.
2. In the Class Builder transaction (SE24), display the /BTL/TR_CL_WD_TRIP class.
3. Open and activate the method CREATE_ITEM.

B. Adjusting, Copying and Creating a New Symbol Schema for the Documents

1. In Customizing for S4SCSD, choose Integrated Dispatch Management (IDM) Trip Planning Symbols
Define Symbol Schema Group .
2. Select the items. Choose Define Symbol Schema in the dialog structure.
3. Select Unloadings. In the dialog structure, choose Assign Fields to Symbol Schema.
4. Choose New Entries.
5. In the Field Name column, select the field that you created in the /BTL/TRS_WDC_IDMDOC structure.
6. Enter the other parameters.
○ You can use the Value From and Value To columns to determine that the visualization is valid for certain
value ranges only. You can use an asterisk * character as a placeholder for this purpose.
○ The input help for the Visualization column is determined by the values that are selected in the
Visualization Type and Visualization Position columns. The graphics are in the MIME Repository under
Public BC BTL IDM SYMBOLS .
7. Save your entries.

C. Assigning the Symbol Schema to the Item Categories

1. In Customizing for S4SCSD, choose Integrated Dispatch Management (IDM) Trip Planning Symbols
Assign Symbol Schema to Item Category .
2. Assign the symbol schema to the item category or item categories.
3. Save your entries.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 189
 Note

If you use delivery zones with large quantities of data, this can lead to performance issues.

8.1.4.1.2 Vehicle Live Tracking

This feature enables you to view the position of your vehicles and trailers on the road map.

Use

You can use this function to display the position of your vehicles and trailers on the road map using the data
provided by an external global navigation satellite system. A regular update of the data means that the latest
position and status of the vehicles and trailers are always displayed.

Features

You can activate and deactivate the tracking display with Vehicle Tracking. The function is located in the toolbar
at the top of the road map.

Prerequisites

General
You have equipped your vehicles and trailers with appropriate hardware. You use middleware that transfers the
data to IDM via IDoc or BAPI.

Customizing
A default value is delivered for each Customizing setting; however, you can change this default value.

You can make the following settings in Customizing for Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) under Trip
Planning :

● General Settings Define Default Values .


Select the group IDMIntegrated Dispatch Management. Choose Assign Values.
○ TULOC_UPDATE_INTERVALTU Location/Status Update Interval (Seconds): Here you configure after
how many seconds the location and status are to be updated on the road map. The default value is
0300.
○ TULOC_DELETE_LIMITDelete Limit for TU Location/Status (in Days): Here you configure after how
many days the entries for the location and the status in table /BTL/TR_TULOC are to be deleted.

Application Help for S4SCSD


190 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
○ TULOC_ACTIVEActivate TU Location/Status Display: Here you configure whether the location and
status data is to be displayed on the road map.
● General Settings System Modifications Business Add-Ins Data Update Vehicle Live Tracking .
Here, the BAdI /BTL/TR_BADI_TUNITLOC_0100Update TU Location and Status is available, which you
assign under Actions and Context Menu.
● Trip, Item Categories, and Delivery Zones
○ Define Item Type: The item type TORTransportation Unit is defined as standard.
○ Define Item Category: The tem category TORTransportation Unit is defined as standard.
○ Assign Item Category to Trip Category: The item category TORTransportation Unit is assigned to the trip
category BLKBulk Category as standard.
● Symbols
Define Symbol Schema Group: You configure the status here.
○ 1. Select the symbol PItem. Choose Define Symbol Schema.
2. Select the schema 400Transportation Unit. Choose Assign Fields to Symbol Schema.
Assign Symbol Schema to Item Category: Here, you assign the symbol schema to the item category. This is
the item category TOR in the standard system.
● Text Information
Define Text Information Schema: Here, you define the text information schema.
○ 1. Select DIDM Document. Choose Create Text Information Schema.
2. Select 4Transportation Unit on the Road Map. Choose Assign Text Information Fields to Schema.
Assign Text Information Schema to Document: Here, you assign the text information schema to the
document. The text information schema 4 is assigned to the item category TORTransportation Unit by
default.
● Actions and Context Menu: Here, you assign the method for updating the data of an action group.
1. Select BLKBulk Category. Choose Assign Action Group to Trip Category.
2. Select /BTL/TRS_ACTION_UPDTAction Group for Update. Choose Assign Method to Action.
3. In the standard system, the action /BTL/TR_BADI_TUNITLOC_0100Update of TU Location and Status
is assigned the method 1.

Related Information

Road Map [page 184]

8.1.4.2 Document Overview

Displays loading documents and unloading documents.

Use

You can use this function to display loading contracts and unloading contracts.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 191
The document overview is located in the toolbar, under Display Document Overview .

Activities

You can choose between the view of Loading Plants/Contracts or Unloadings . You can also choose
both views.

The number of documents is displayed next to the title.

You can sort or filter directly in the columns in both areas.

You can also adjust the sequence of the columns. To do this, drag the column heading of the columns in
question.

In the Settings, you can specify which columns you want to be displayed.

Loading Plants/Contracts

The following table outlines the item categories:

Item Categories

Item category Name of Item Category

LLB Own Stock

PUC Purchase contract

If the available quantity has a certain value, it is highlighted in color.

Flag According to Available Quantity


Available Quantity Color

0 or negative Red

This setting is defined in the CDS view /BTL/TRL_ODATA_LOADING with the metadata extension /BTL/
TRL_ODATA_LOADING_METADAT.

You can create a trip from within the overview by dragging it to the Gantt chart.

Unloadings

When you click on a row, the item is displayed on the road map and in the trip in the Gantt chart. Double-
clicking the item brings it into focus on the road map and displays the trip with a gray background in the Gantt
chart.

You can use the mouse wheel to scroll in the overview.

If the document has a particular header status, this is highlighted in color.

Application Help for S4SCSD


192 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Identification by Header Status
Document Header Status Color

New Green

Changed Yellow

Deleted Red

This setting is defined in the CDS view /BTL/TRL_ODATA_UNLOADING with the metadata extension /BTL/
TRL_ODATA_UNLOAD_METADAT.

Filter
You have the following options for filtering:

● Filter in the columns


You can filter directly in a column. Click on the column header. Choose Filter. Enter the values.
● Filterfunction
For filter settings in multiple columns, you can use the Filter  function.
You can save a search as a view. To do so, click the Select View  arrow icon next to the title of the view.
The views are displayed in all delivery zones.

 Caution

When you create a filter and close the document overview, the filters remain active. This may prevent all of
the items on the road map from being displayed.

 Caution

Alphanumeric values are filtered according to the standard rules of the SAP system.

Additional Functions
● Display Settings 
Here, you can make settings for the columns, sorting, and filtering.
● Export 
Here, you can export the data to a spreadsheet.
● Maximize 
Here you can display the document overview in a maximized view.

8.1.4.3 Gantt chart

Shows the trips created and enables further processing of the trips.

Use

The trips created are displayed in a Gantt chart. On mouseover, information is displayed for the trips and for
the items. You have functions for further planning available.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 193
The Gantt chart is located in the toolbar under Display Gantt Chart .

Features

Display Area
You can specify the number of past and future days that can be planned in Customizing for S4SCSD, under
S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and Item Categories and Delivery Zones Define Trip Category . When a new
trip is created, its trip category must have the trip type Planning. You can change the days in the detail view of a
trip category.

View Selection
For more information, see View Selection.

Second Gantt Chart

You can use the pushbutton Shows Two Gantt Charts  to display an additional Gantt chart. For example, if
you want to move a trip, this helps you find and move it.

Trip Search
For more information, see Trip Search.

Time Scale and Zoom

On startup, the system displays the current day. In Customizing, under Integrated Dispatch Management
(S4IDM) Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups , you can configure an offset under Start
Offset for the Gantt Chart in DaysGANTT_START_OFFSET. The offset can be negative or positive. With setting 2,
the offset is started with the day after tomorrow.

You can use the arrow pushbuttons to navigate a month, a week, or a day backwards or forwards. These
periods are always based on the date that was last selected.

Choosing Today allows you to display the current date again.

You can use the minus  and plus  magnifying icons to zoom. You have six zoom levels available.

At the bottom of the Gantt chart, you can use a slider and the arrows to navigate.

Settings
For details, see Settings.

Display Options
The trips created are depicted as horizontal bars in the Gantt chart. An outbound delivery tour is composed of
one or more trips. A trip is composed of a number of items. An item is composed of a number of activities.

All elements have a 1:n relationship to one another.

You can execute various actions using the context menus for the elements. You can configure the actions in
Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Actions and Context Menu .

Application Help for S4SCSD


194 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Colors are used to identify the different activities and item categories. You can set the colors in Customizing for
S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and Item Categories and Delivery Zones Define Item
Category .

Deleted and changed items are highlighted in color.

A colored circle denotes the item on the road map when you mouseover it on the Gantt chart.

Trip
A trip is composed of one or more items from a document.

Various information is displayed in the header area.

● Trip status
A symbol in the trip displays the status for checked or released trips. These and other statuses are
displayed in the text information.
The following table outlines the possible statuses for a trip in the quick info:

Status
Status Value Meaning

Checked A The trip was checked according to the


settings in Customizing.

Released B The trip has been released. Changes


are still possible. A temporary trip
number is replaced by a regular one.

Sent C The trip was sent to a follow-up sys­


tem, such as an onboard unit.

Partially Confirmed D Some, but not all, items of the trip


have been reported to the trip-related
data collation.

Fully Confirmed E All items of the trip have been re­


ported to the trip-related data colla­
tion.

Partly Posted F Not all items of the trip have been


posted by data collation yet.

Fully Posted G All items of the trip have been posted


by the data collation.

 Note

You can set that a released trip is automatically transferred to the trip-related data collation. To do so,
choose the following in Customizing for S4SCSD: S4IDM Trip Planning Actions and Context
Menu Configure Actions . Select the trip category and choose Assign Action Group to Trip Category.
Select Action Group for User Actions, choose Assign Method to Action. Set method 2 for the Release
Trip action in the Method column.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 195
○ Navigation
When you click on the header area, the trip is displayed on the road map. The trip is displayed with a
frame.

You can perform the following actions using the context menu in the header area:

● Assign Tractor
○ Select a different tractor. If no tractor is assigned yet, you can assign one.
● Assign Driver
○ Select a different driver. If no driver is assigned yet, you can assign one.
● Display Activities
○ The activities of all trips with the specified duration are displayed. A second figure shows the total
length of time for each item. The context menu gives you information about the chosen activity.
Examples of activities are:
○ Vehicle pickup or vehicle handover
○ Preparation time
○ Pump time
○ Driving time
○ Break
You define the activities in Customizing for S4SCSD, under S4IDM Trip Planning Activities .

 Note

You can also hide the activities. To do so, choose the following in Customizing for S4SCSD:
S4IDM Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups . For the field name
HIDE_ACTIVITIESDo Not Display Activities in IDM Trip, enter the value X .

● Lock Trip
○ The trip is locked. A newly created trip is automatically locked.
● Unlock Trip
○ The trip is unlocked. The color of the header area changes.
● Define Trip Sequence Automatically
○ For the trip, a sequence is automatically determined and defined for the outbound delivery tour. Plants
and unloads are taken into account. In Customizing for S4SCSD, under Integrated Dispatch
Management (S4IDM) Geographical Services Define Technical Parameters for Map Services , you
can configure the parameters for the sequence. To do so, select the service group that is indicated as
the default. Choose Create Connections. Choose SEQUENCE Automatic Trip Sequence, enter the other
data. To define the parameters, choose Define Default Parameters.
○ COOLINGRATE Reduction rate
Specifies the rate by which the temperature is reduced per iteration. The lower the reduction rate,
the longer the runtime and better the result.
○ DISTFACTOR Priority of distance
Specifies the weighting of distance and time. Example: The factor 0.7 means considering the
distance 70% and the time 30%.
○ TEMPFACTOR Calculation value factor
Multiplied by the number of stops and results in the start calculation value. The higher the
calculation value factor, the longer the runtime and better the result.
The calculation value is equivalent to the probability of an intermediate result being allowed to make
the specification worse.

Application Help for S4SCSD


196 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
The reduction rate controls how fast this probability is reduced.
You can use the interface /ICO/GS_IF_SEQUENCE to connect an external optimization, such as PTV xTour.
● Check Trip
○ All checks set in Customizing for Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM), under Trip Planning
Checks are taken into account. An icon and a colored footer indicate the check performed. You can
only perform the check if a tractor has been assigned.
● Release Trip
○ The trip is released. An icon and a colored footer indicate the release performed. Changes are no
longer possible. The temporary trip number is replaced by a regular one.
● Delete Trip
○ The trip is deleted from the Gantt chart. The orders are available for planning again. You can also drag
the trip onto the road map to delete it.
● Transfer and Return Loading from Previous Trip
○ With this option, you transfer the loading from the previous released trip. You can also return these
transferred loadings.
You have the same functions in the vehicle diagram. There, in the detailed view Transportation Units,
you can transfer the previous released loadings for the selected transport unit. To do this, in the
context menu of the transport unit, select Transfer Loading from Previous Trip or Return Loading from
Previous Trip.
The prerequisites for this function are as follows:
○ You must set the value Loading Unit or Not Relevant for at least one transportation unit in the trip
in the Maintain Business Partner BP transaction in the IDM Vehicle Depot on the Transportation
Units tab page in the Control column.
○ The loading material must be in the loading unit (chamber) in the trip from which it is transferred.
You can check this in the vehicle diagram.
○ You must have released the trip from which the transfer takes place. So the status must be B.

You can perform the following actions using the context menu in the item area:

● Display Activities
○ The activities of the item are displayed. Text information is displayed on mouseover.
● Delete Item
○ The item is deleted from the trip.

Related Information

View Selection [page 197]


Trip Search [page 199]
Settings [page 199]

8.1.4.3.1 View Selection

Allows you to switch between the views for drivers and vehicles.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 197
Use

In the toolbar of the Gantt chart, choose whether you want to see the drivers  or the vehicles .

The respective view displays drivers and trailers that are assigned to the delivery zones that you
selected when you started Trip Planning.

When you click a driver or vehicle, an information screen is displayed. To close the information screen, click the
Gantt chart or a different panel.

Views

Driver view
All drivers of the delivery zone are displayed regardless of whether the driver is available. The drivers are sorted
in ascending order by last name.

For example, the default vehicle and the default equipment of the driver are displayed in the information
screen.

If the driver is assigned to a carrier, the carrier information is also displayed. You use the Relationships
pushbutton in the transaction Edit Business PartnerBP to create the assignment of a driver to a carrier. If you
want to assign a driver with the role IDM Driver to a carrier, choose the relationship category Is Driver for. These

drivers are displayed with red highlighting in the view. If you want to assign a driver to a carrier with the
role IDM Carrier, choose the relationship category Has Driver.

Vehicle View
The vehicles are sorted in ascending order by name within the vehicle depots, which are sorted in ascending
order by the business partner GUID. If there is no description in the logon language, the equipment number is
displayed.

You can enter the names of the vehicles in several languages. For this setting, see the SAP Menu under
S4SCSD Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Master Data Equipment and Transportation
Units in the transactions Create EquipmentIE01 and Change EquipmentIE02, in the menu under Goto
Multilingual Texts .

Search

In both views you have an input field available for the search. For the vehicles, what is displayed in the list is
always what is searched for. This can be the equipment name or the equipment number. If you choose the icon
 in the search input field, other options for the search are displayed.

You can save a search as a view. To do so, click the Select View  arrow icon next to the title of the view. The
views are displayed in all delivery zones.

Application Help for S4SCSD


198 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
8.1.4.3.2 Trip Search

Allows you to search for trips in the Gantt chart.

Activities

1. In the toolbar of the Gantt chart, choose Find Trip. The trips that correspond to your settings in the start
variant are displayed.
2. Search for a trip You can modify the search under Settings.
3. Select a trip. Choose Go to trip.
4. The trip is displayed in the Gantt chart.

8.1.4.3.3 Settings

Describes the configuration options in the Gantt chart.

Use

You can configure various settings for the Gantt chart.

Features

Display Current Time


Displays a red, dotted vertical line, which indicates the current time of the personal time zone. You set the
personal time zone in the user profile.

Displaying the cursor line


Shows a vertical blue line that follows the mouse pointer. The time of the selected item is also displayed.

Display Separators
Displays vertical lines between time periods.

Related Information

Create Trip from Document Overview [page 180]

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 199
8.1.4.4 Resources

Displays the resources that are available for the outbound delivery, such as transportation units, trailers,
equipment, and drivers.

Use

The resources are located in the toolbar under Display Resource List .

You can assign resources to a vehicle in the vehicle chart by dragging them from the resource list, and you can
also remove them.

In the driver view, available resources are displayed as follows:

● Tractors
● Trailers
● Equipment

In the driver view, the following available resources are displayed:

● Drivers
● Trailers
● Equipment

You can choose the views in the toolbar of the Gantt chart.

The resources can be gathered into groups. The available tractors are grouped by vehicle type. To expand the
group, click the arrow .

If the mouse pointer is over the text part, a quick info is displayed for each resource.

If you select a resource, this equipment is displayed with a red background in the Gantt chart. This enables you
to see where this resource is already in use and therefore unavailable.

You can assign equipment to a transport unit as fixed equipment or to a vehicle depot as loose equipment. You
can only assign fixed equipment to a TU. Fixed equipment is displayed in the detailed vies under Equipment,
not in the resource overview.

Related Information

Equipment and Transport Units [page 218]

8.1.4.5 Vehicle Chart

Displays the transport units involved in a trip, including loading states and detail views.

Application Help for S4SCSD


200 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Use

The vehicle chart is located in the toolbar under Display Vehicle Chart .

Select a trip in the Gantt chart. Graphics with data on loading the transportation unit and detail views is
displayed in two areas.

Features

The vehicle chart is divided into two areas:

● Vehicle chart graphic


● Detail view

Related Information

Vehicle Graphic [page 201]


Detail View [page 203]

8.1.4.5.1 Vehicle Graphic

Graphically displays the loadings and unloadings of a transportation unit, as well as detailed views.

Use

The transportation units for the selected trip are displayed in the Gantt chart in the right pane. You can choose
one or more views for a selected transportation unit:

● Loading

● Load

● Unloading

Each material is displayed in a different color.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 201
The left pane displays details in different, selectable views.

Prerequisites

You have defined the texts to be displayed in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Text
Information Define Text Information Scheme .

You can configure which material is indicated by which color in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM
Master Data Assign Material Planning Group Indicator to Material . Specify the color code in the column
ColrCode. If you do not define any colors here, all materials are shown in black.

You can define the type of quantity control in the transaction Maintain Business PartnerBP.

Activities

Choose a trip in the Gantt chart.

If a quantity is too large for the loading unit, it is divided between the other loading units. Filling is always
conducted from left to right. Already filled loading units are skipped.

If there are no more free loading units available on the right, the quantity that could not be assigned yet
remains in the detail view in the worklist. You can then assign this remaining quantity to a free loading unit on
the left, exchange the transport unit, or add a trailer.

You can move the quantities within the loading units.

You can assign an item to a loading unit or transport unit in the following ways:

● Drag an item from the worklist in the detailed view.


● Distribute all sales orders using the function Spread Worklist Among TUs in the context menu of the
worklist in the detail view.

You can add additional sales orders or loadings to the loading unit or transport unit in the following ways:

● Drag an item from a trip in the Gantt chart.


● Drag an item from the road map.
● Drag an unloading or loading document from the document overview.

Related Information

Vehicle Chart [page 200]


Detail View [page 203]
Quantity Control [page 204]

Application Help for S4SCSD


202 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
8.1.4.5.2 Detail View

Displays details for a trip selected in the Gantt chart.

Use

Here, you can view details about a trip for views that can be selected.

Prerequisites

Configure which data is displayed in the detail view in Customizing under S4SCSD S4IDM Trip Planning
Text Information Define Text Information Schema .

Views

The following views are available:

Transport Units
Shows the details for the transport units.

You define the data in Customizing in the Transport Unit for Trip schema group.

The context menu contains the following entries:

● Delete Transport Unit from Trip


The selected transport unit is deleted. You can also remove transport units by dragging them into the
resource overview.
● Transfer Loading from Previous TU
All released loadings are transferred to the selected transport unit.
● Return Loading from Previous TU
All released loadings are returned for the selected transport unit.
● Reset Worklist of TUs
The worklist of the selected TU is placed back into the detailed view Worklist.

Equipment
Shows details for the equipment assigned to the transportation unit. Fixed equipment is assigned to the
transport unit and is indicated by a light bar on the left border. A dark border indicates the assignment of loose
equipment from the resource overview. You can remove loose equipment by dragging it into the resource
overview. You can only remove fixed equipment from a transport unit in transaction BP. For more information,
see Equipment and Transport Units. You define the data in Customizing in the Equipment for Trip schema
group.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 203
Driver
Displays details about the driver. You can remove the driver by dragging it into the resource overview while in
the vehicle view. You define the data in Customizing in the Driver for Trip schema group.

Worklist
Shows the details of open orders. The display is similar to the transport unit chart after loading and unloading.

The context menu contains the following entries:

● Spread Worklist Among TUs


The worklist is distributed among the existing TUs. You can also distribute the worklist by dragging.
● Reset Worklist of TUs
The worklist is reset. You can also reset the worklist by dragging.

Related Information

Equipment and Transport Units [page 218]

8.1.4.5.3 Quantity Control

Controls the behavior of the assignment of items in the vehicle chart.

Use of Quantity Control

The quantity control determines whether quantities are assigned to transportation units (TU) or loading units
(SU) in the vehicle chart graphic. The type of quantity control also determines how the graphics are displayed
in the vehicle chart.

You specify the type of quantity control for each transport unit in the transaction Edit Business PartnerBP for a
vehicle depot in the role IDM Vehicle Depot on the Transport Units tab page in the Transport Units group box in
the Control column.

For example, you can set a tank truck as a loading unit and set the accompanying trailer as a transport unit. If
you change the quantity control for a transport unit, trip planning must be restarted. Future trips are then
created using the new quantity control. Existing trips are not changed.

If you change the transport unit and the involved transport units have different quantity controls, any assigned
loading is released again for planning. A corresponding message appears.

You can assign the quantities for an unplanned item either in the detail view under Worklist or directly from the
road map. If you add an item, the quantity in the detail view is not updated.

Transport unit
If the quantity control is set to transportation unit, a volume is displayed in the view Total for each loading
condition. You can choose loading, load, or unloading. The views for each TU do not show anything.

Application Help for S4SCSD


204 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
If you drag a quantity from the detail view Worklist, the background becomes colored. You can then release the
quantity.

Loading Unit
If the quantity control is set to loading unit, a volume is displayed for each loading state for each loading unit,
such as a chamber.

Usage of Handling Type

The handling type controls how many orders can be assigned per compartment.

You define the settings for the handling type for each transportation unit in the transaction Edit Business
PartnerBP for a vehicle depot in the role IDM Vehicle Depot on the Transportation Units tab page in the
Transportation Units group box in the Handling Type column.

8.1.4.6 Multi-Function

Allows you to check and release multiple trips simultaneously.

Use

The multifunction is located in the toolbar under Display Multifunctional Tool  .

The trips that match the criteria of the start parameters are displayed in a list.

This data is displayed in the column Trip Info (T/D/T):

● Trip Number (T)


● Driver (D)
● Tractor (T)
For the tractor, the description of the equipment is displayed from the equipment master data. If there is
no description in the logon language in the master data, the system displays the equipment number.

If the trip has a particular header status, this is highlighted in color.

Identification by Trip Header Status


Status Color

Checked Yellow

Released Green

Partly posted

Fully posted

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 205
This setting is defined in the CDS view /BTL/TRL_ODATA_TRIP_HIERAR with the metadata extension /BTL/
TRL_ODATA_TRIP_HIER_META.

Activities

Search for specific trips. To check or release these trips, select them. Then choose the function Check Trip or
Release Trip.

8.1.4.7 Change Start Variants

Describes how you can change the parameters for the current Trip Planning.

Use

You can use this function to change the parameters of the current Trip Planning.

Activities

To do this, choose Open Start Variants View in the toolbar. Change the parameters. To copy the data, choose
Confirm.

To undo entries, choose Reset.

Related Information

Start Variants [page 178]

Application Help for S4SCSD


206 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
8.1.5 Delivery Zone

Determines a geographical area for the outbound delivery of the materials for each material planning group
indicator (MPGI).

Use

For each material planning group indicator (MPGI), delivery zones define an area for the outbound delivery of
your materials. The area contains certain zip code areas or zip code groups.

You can also set up the delivery zones (DZs) in a hierarchy. That means DZs can be lower-level or higher-level in
relation to other DZs. The highest hierarchy level is the top delivery zone (TDZ). Lower-level DZs are sub-
delivery zones (SDZs). The lowest delivery zone is the end delivery zone (EDZ). All delivery zones between the
TDZ and the EDZ are intermediate delivery zones (IDZ).

If there is only one DZ, it is simultaneously the TDZ.

Prerequisites

You have defined delivery zones in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and Item
Categories and Delivery Zones Define Delivery Zones .

In Customizing for S4SCSD, you defined the method that should be used to determine the delivery zones
under S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and Item Categories and Delivery Zones Define Determination of
Delivery Zone .

Is possible to perform this determination using the business partner data or the master data. You can enter the
values in the following places:

● In the transaction Edit Business Partner DataBP for the role Customer on the tab page Geo-Info/Delivery
Zones
● In the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Assign Postal Codes to Delivery Zone

You assigned material to the MPGI in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Assign
Material to MPGI .

Example

The following example outlines how the delivery zone is determined according to the settings in the business
partner data.

You have created a sales order with two items.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 207
In the SAP Menu, you have assigned the material OIL_N05 to item10 of the MPGI M012 under S4SCSD
S4IDM Master Data Assign Material to MPGI . You assigned the material OIL_S10 of item 20 to the MPGI
M075.

You have assigned to the MPGI group MG10 to the delivery zone Q10A in the transaction Edit Business
PartnerBP in the role Customer on the tab page Geo-Info/Delivery Zones in the group box Delivery Zones. You
have assigned the MPGI M012 to the delivery zone Q20A.

If a delivery zone is already assigned to an MPGI group, the delivery zone may not be assigned to any MPGI
individually. That is because no delivery zone can be determined in that case. Therefore, MPGI M012 may not
also be assigned to the MPGI group MG10 in this example.

In Customizing for S4SCSD, under S4IDM Trip Planning Define Trip and Item Categories and Delivery
Zones , you assigned MPGI M075 and MPGI M025 to the MPGI group MG10 in the Group Delivery Zones activity.

These settings result in item 10 belonging to delivery zone Q20A and item 20 belonging to delivery zone Q10A.

Application Help for S4SCSD


208 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
The following figure shows how the delivery zone determination described above occurs:

8.1.6 Units

Different units are used within IDM. This section contains information on correlations, settings, and
conversions.

Units of Measure

In Trip Planning, units can be displayed in different units of measure (UoM). Depending on the display location,
a conversion may take place.

The unit of measure for the order item is displayed.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 209
The following table outlines the exceptions:

Units of Measure
Function City Unit of Measure (UoM)

Trip planning Text information for item on road map Display UoM of MPGI (configured in
for MPGI quantity Customizing)

Vehicle Chart Displays UoM of TU

Contract Lists Loading Plants/ Displays UoM of contract


Contracts

There is also another setting for the quantity. The quantity area of the MPGI item quantity can be displayed
using different specifications for the inner shape of the symbol of the item on the road map.

Settings
● Each transport unit (TU) has a volume unit specified in the master data. You can find the setting in the SAP
Menu under S4SCSD Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Master Data Equipment and
Transport Units Create Equipment or Change Equipment. On the Vehicle ID / Measmnts tab page, in the
Transport-Relevant Data group box, specify the unit of measure in the Volume Unit field.
You can also specify a UoM per compartment, however this will not be taken into account in IDM.

● Each material planning group indicator (MPGI) has a base unit of measure specified in Customizing. You
can find this setting in Customizing for S4SCSD under Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Trip
Planning Trip and Item Categories and Delivery Zones Define Material Planning Group . In the BUn field
you specify the unit of measure.

● Each order item has a sales unit that you enter when creating a sales order. If you do not enter a UoM, the
base unit of measure (BUn) from the master data for the material is used.

Currency and Volume Units

Currencies and volume units are always converted to the unit that you have entered in Customizing for
S4SCSD under Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Trip Planning Trip and Item Categories and
Delivery Zones Define Delivery Zone Group in the column Ref.cur. or BUn if the units are different. This
setting applies to the top delivery zones of the group.

If the master data for the driver and the transport unit contains data for the currency and volume, this is
converted to the units for Define Delivery Zone Group. If the master data does not contain any units, Create
Profiles and Define Profile Parameters is called. If units are entered there, the conversion is performed into the
units for the Define Delivery Zone Group setting. If no data is entered, the units for Define Delivery Zone Group
are used.

If a unit of currency is entered in the geographical services, this is converted to the currency for Define Delivery
Zone Group. If no currency is entered there, the unit from Define Delivery Zone Group is used.

Application Help for S4SCSD


210 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
The following table outlines where which parameters are entered:

Parameter Settings
Setting Path Field/Parameter

Transport unit In the menu: S4SCSD under S4IDM None

Master Data Equipment and


Transport Units Create Fixed Values
of TU

Material planning group indicator In Customizing: S4SCSD under BUn


S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and
Item Categories and Delivery Zones
Define Material Planning Group
Indicator

Delivery zone group In Customizing: S4SCSD under Ref.cur.


S4IDM Trip Planning Trip and
Item Categories and Delivery Zones
Define Delivery Zone Group

Geographical services In Customizing: S4SCSD under Unit of Measurement


Geographical Services Define
Technical Parameters for Map
Services

 Caution

For the conversion, an interface that accesses table TCURR is provided. You need to obtain the up-to-date
currency data yourself.

8.1.7 Plant and Contract Determination


Describes the determination of plants and contracts in IDM.

Use

In the standard system, the plant and contract from the sales order (provided that it exists) are always used.

If you have not entered a storage location, all of the storage locations are assigned to the plant automatically.

If you want to change this standard procedure, you must set a new determination in the S4SCSD menu under
S4IDM Master Data Set Plant and Contract Determination .

While the trip is being planned, material availability is checked in the selected or determined plant. If the
material does not exist in the plant or a purchase contract does not exist, no items are created. Only those
purchase contracts that you have entered in the master data under Set Plant and Contract Determination are
included.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 211
If a plant and contract are entered in a sales order, the plant from the contract is used.

If a plant is entered in a sales order and there are no entries in plant and contract determination, the plant from
the sales order is used. If there are entries in plant and contract determination, these settings are used.

If there is a manually selected plant but no settings in plant and contract determination, the manually selected
plant is used. If there are entries in plant and contract determination, these settings are used.

The following figure illustrates an example of the process flow for plant determination; contract determination
is conducted in the same way:

Example

Case 1
A sales order with reference to a contract was selected together with a plant using the connection tool on the
road map.

● The plant selected on the road map has priority.


● The contract in the sales order is ignored.
● Using the outbound delivery material (the material to be delivered to the customer) from the sales order
and the selected plant, loading-relevant materials are determined in the Define Mixed Products table, if
applicable.

Application Help for S4SCSD


212 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
● For each loading material, the corresponding loading plant and, if applicable, contract are determined from
the Plant and Contract Determination table.

Case 2
A sales order with reference to a contract was selected without a plant on the road map.

● The plant from the contract in the sales order is used.


● The target plant or contract is determined for all loading-relevant materials from the Plant and Contract
Determination table.
● The contract is taken into account when the loading material corresponds to the material from the
contract. If this is not the case, a warning is issued, but the automatic loading process continues.

Case 3
A sales order was selected together with a plant using the connection tool on the road map.

● The plant selected on the road map has priority.


● The plant from the sales order is ignored.
● The target plant or contract is determined for all loading-relevant materials from the Plant and Contract
Determination table.

Case 4
A sales order was selected on the road map.

● The plant from the sales order is used.


● The target plant or contract is determined for all loading-relevant materials from the Plant and Contract
Determination table.

All of the cases described above are scenarios for the determination of loading materials based on an outbound
delivery material. The function module for material movement, however, can also be used for the following
purposes:

● The loading materials can be determined based on the material in the vehicle. This excludes the steps for
the determination of the material in the vehicle and continues from the point at which the loading material
is determined (see Case 1).
● The material in the vehicle can be determined based on the loading material. The data for the material in
the vehicle is taken from the data for the loading material rather than conducting an actual determination.

8.1.8 Mixed Products

Describes how a mixed product is formed from multiple individual materials.

Use

You can only mix materials that have the same material planning group indicator (MPGI).

The loading-relevant materials for plant and contract determination are determined with the entries in this
table.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 213
If you have not entered a storage location, all of the storage locations are assigned to the plant automatically.
There can only be one outbound delivery material (ODM) or one material in vehicle (MiV) for each material in
the sales order. If multiple entries are found, an error is issued, and the automatic loading process is canceled
in Trip Planning.

The determination of the materials relevant for loading is carried out for the material in the sales order for each
plant and delivery zone.

If there is no entry in the master data, the material in the sales order is loaded.

If there is an entry in the master data and the ODM is a reclassified product, the material entry from the
reclassified ODM in the allocation is determined. If there is an entry for MiV in the master data, the material
entries from MiV in the allocation are loaded. If there is no entry for MiV in the master data, the reclassified
material is loaded.

If the ODM in the master data is not a reclassified product, the material entries from MiV in the allocation are
loaded.

The following figure illustrates the determination of the loading-relevant materials:

Prerequisites

In the SAP Menu, you have defined the mixed products under S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Define
Mixed Products .

Application Help for S4SCSD


214 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Related Information

Plant and Contract Determination [page 211]

8.1.9 Business Partner Roles

Describes how to create objects from IDM as business partners and which roles are available.

Use

You use the business partner role to determine which data needs to be entered for a business partner.

 Note

You can control how to locate business partners by entering the coordinates. You can also use a report. You
can find it in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Geographical Data Locate Addresses .

Prerequisites

You have created the business partner in the transaction Edit Business PartnerBP.

You create these business partners as persons:

● Driver

You create these business partners as organizations:

● Plants
● Vehicle depots
● Carriers

The IDM business partner roles are defined in Customizing. You can find these in SAP Customizing under
Cross-Application Components SAP Business Partner Business Partner Basic Settings Business Partner
Roles Define BP Roles . IDM business partner roles are provided in the standard version.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 215
Roles

The following business partner roles exist:

Role RNBDRV for IDM drivers


Role RNBDRV for IDM Drivers
Tab Page Entry or Assignment

Driver ● Licenses (optional)*


● Availability (optional)*
● Vehicle depots. For more information, see the section
Activate Vehicle Depot.
● Default Assignment for TU and Equipment (optional).
For more information, see the section Default Assign­
ment.

Address Name

* Values for licensing and availability are required only if you want to check this data during trip planning. To
check licensing, you must create a method. You can activate the availability check in Customizing under
S4SCSD S4IDM Trip Planning General Settings Define Default Groups . Activate
ENABLE_DRVAV_CHK there.

Default Assignment

You can assign a default transport unit with a tractor to the driver after you have activated one or more vehicle
depots. You can assign other transport units to the driver.

When you assign a document to a driver in the Gantt chart, this default transport unit is assigned to the trip
automatically. If a default transport unit is not assigned, No TU is displayed in the header area. If you assign a
document to a transport unit that is not a default transport unit for a driver, No Driver is displayed.

Relationships

You can set up a relationship for a driver to a carrier.

You use the Relationships pushbutton in transaction Edit Business PartnerBP to create the assignment of a
driver to a carrier. If you assign a driver to a carrier, choose the relationship category Is Driver for. If you assign
a carrier to a driver, choose the relationship category Has Driver.

For this relationship assignment, the relationship category Driver RelationshipRNBFWA is necessary. You can
create relationship categories in the transaction Relationship CategoriesBUBA. This relationship category is
delivered in the standard system.

When a driver belongs to a carrier, it is assumed that the driver's vehicle also belongs to the carrier.

Role RNBTL for IDM vehicle depot


Role RNBTL for IDM Vehicle Depot
Tab Page Entry or Assignment

Address ● Name
● Street Address

Application Help for S4SCSD


216 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Tab Page Entry or Assignment

Transport Units ● Transport Units


If applicable, Deleted is displayed in the Status column.
This indicates that the TU has been flagged for deletion.
In the Handling Type column, you can select whether
only one or multiple orders per loading unit are permit­
ted for the selected quantity control.
You select the type of quantity control in the Control col­
umn. The quantity control can be conducted by loading
unit or transport unit.
In the columns Valid From and Valid To, you can config-
ure a validity period for the assignment.
To display the fixed equipment for a TU, select a TU in
the Transport Units group box and choose the
Equipment for Transport Unit pushbutton for the trans­
port unit in the Equipment of TU <Name> group box.
● Equipment for TU (Fixed)

Equipment ● Equipment (Loose)

Vehicle Depot ● Additional Data

Geo-Info/Delivery Zones ● Geo Coordinates


● Delivery Zones
You can assign the vehicle depot to a number of delivery
zones that have the same TDZ.

Activate Vehicle Depot

The Active field in the Vehicle Depot group box causes drivers in sub delivery zones who are assigned to this
vehicle depot to be displayed in the driver view of Trip Planning. This therefore controls the geographical area of
the driver for trip planning.

Role RNBPL for IDM Plant


You must assign each IDM plant to a plant in the master data of BP in the role RNBPL. You can also enter a
storage location. If you do not assign a storage location, all of the storage locations are assigned to the plant
automatically.

Role RNBPL for IDM Plant


Tab Page Entry or Assignment

Address ● Name
● Street Address

Plant/Storage Location ● Plant assignment


● Additional data (optional)

Geo-Info/Delivery Zones ● Geo Coordinates


● Delivery Zones

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 217
Role for IDM Carrier RNBFWA
Tab Page Entry or Assignment

Address ● Name
● Street Address

Forwarding Agent ● Vendor

Related Information

Locating Addresses [page 221]


Equipment and Transport Units [page 218]

8.1.10 Equipment and Transport Units

Describes how you create equipment and transport units as master data.

Use

You must create the transport units (TU) and loading units as equipment and assign the loading units to the
TU.

A prerequisite for this is that you have configured the relevant Customizing settings for Plant Maintenance and
Customer Service.

SAP Customizing Prerequisites

Since the transport units are created as equipment, you need to configure the following settings in Customizing
for SAP under SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Plant Maintenance and Customer Service Master
Data in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service Technical Objects .

● Under General Data Define Types of Technical Objects .


Here, you define your technical objects, such as tractors or trailers.
● Under Settings for Fleet Management Assign View Profile and Equipment Categories to Fleet Object
Types .
Here, you enter the object types entered in Define Types of Technical Objects as a vehicle type.

 Caution

The vehicle type will become the transport unit category for trip planning in Customizing for S4SCSD
under S4IDM Trip Planning Transport Unit Define Transport Unit Categories .

Application Help for S4SCSD


218 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
● Under Equipment Equipment Categories Maintain Equipment Category Here, you need to create
two equipment categories for transport units and loading units. The descriptions are freely selectable and
the category can also be freely selected from letters that are not yet being used. So that changes can be
displayed later, set the indicator Equipment Category with Change Documents.
● Under Equipment Equipment Categories Define Number Ranges
Here, you define the number range for the equipment numbers.

Activities

Define Vehicle Type

You define the vehicle type in the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide, under Plant Maintenance and
Customer Service Master Data in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service Technical Objects General
Data Define Types of Technical Objects . The vehicle type is named with the object type here. The vehicle
type determines the grouping in the resource list.

Create Transport Unit as Equipment

1. In the SAP Menu, choose S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Equipment and Transport Units Create
Equipment . The screen Create Equipment: Initial Screen appears.
2. Enter a name and category for the equipment. Choose Continue. The screen Create Equipment: General
Data.
3. Enter a name and an object type. Choose Continue. Additional tab pages for Vehicle ID / Measurements
and Vehicle Technology are displayed.
4. Switch to the Vehicle ID / Measurements tab page. Enter the volume unit. Choose Save.

In the Display Multifunction Tool function, the description of the equipment is displayed for the tractor from the
equipment master data. If there is no description in the logon language, the equipment number is displayed.

Create Loading Unit as Equipment and Assign to Transport Unit

1. In the SAP Menu, choose S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Equipment and Transport Units Create
Equipment . The screen Create Equipment: Initial Screen appears.
2. Enter a name and category for the equipment. Choose Continue. The screen Create Equipment: General
Data.
3. Enter a name and an object type. Choose Continue. Additional tab pages for Vehicle ID / Measurements
and Vehicle Technology are displayed.
4. Switch to the Vehicle ID / Measurements tab page. Enter the loading volume. Choose Continue.
5. In the menu, choose Structure Change InstallLoc . The Change Equipment Installation Location dialog
box appears.
6. Enter the transport unit and the item in the Superordinate Equipment field. Choose Confirm.
7. Choose Save.

In the Display Multifunction Tool function, the description of the equipment is displayed for the tractor from the
equipment master data. If there is no description in the logon language, the equipment number is displayed.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 219
Assign Transportation Unit to a Vehicle Depot
If you want to assign a transport unit to a vehicle depot different from the existing assignment or suspend the
validity, proceed in transaction Edit Business Partner as follows:

1. Select the vehicle depot to which the transport unit is currently assigned.
2. Choose the BP role RNBTLIDM Vehicle Depot. Switch to change mode.
3. On the Transport Units tab, select the line with the transport unit you want to change. Choose the Set
Validity pushbutton The Validity of TU <Transport Unit> dialog box appears.
4. Enter the Valid To date. Choose Copy. Save your entries.

You can now assign the changed TU to a different vehicle depot. Checks are run to determine whether the
change is valid. For example, the validities for a TU must not overlap.

Loose Equipment
You assign loose equipment to the corresponding vehicle depot in the transaction Edit Business Partner BP in
the corresponding vehicle depot in the role IDM Vehicle Depot on the Equipment tab page.

Loose equipment is displayed as available equipment in the resource list.

Fixed Equipment
You assign fixed equipment to the corresponding vehicle depot in transaction Edit Business PartnerBP in the
corresponding vehicle depot in the role IDM Vehicle Depot on the Transport Units tab page.

Fixed equipment is displayed in the detail view of the vehicle chart, under Equipment.

Equipment Status
There are different statuses for the equipment. The status is displayed on the tab pages Transportation Unit
and Equipment displayed in the Status column in the transaction Edit Business PartnerBP.

The following table shows the statuses and their meaning:

Status of the Equipment


Status Meaning

Flagged for Deletion Equipment has been flagged for deletion. It is not displayed
in the resource overview.

Error Temporary error while reading equipment.

Inactive Equipment is inactive. It is not displayed in the resource


overview.

Does Not Exist Equipment does not exist. It is not displayed in the resource
overview.

Invalid equipment Category Equipment category is invalid. Assignment is possible, but it


is not displayed in the resource overview.

None Assigned to higher-level equipment (when equipment is hier­


archically structured). It is displayed in the resource over­
view.

Application Help for S4SCSD


220 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
If you have assigned a standard transport unit to the driver, you can assign standard equipment to a driver. In
the transaction Edit Business Partner BP, assign the driver a standard transport unit and then standard
equipment in the role IDM Driver.

Equipment Structure

You can display an equipment structure in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Master Data Display
Equipment Structure . You must select the Equipment Hierarchy indicator. In the Display group box, choose
the As Graphicindicator if the structure is to be displayed as a graphic.

You can also access the graphic and the structure in the Display Equipment and Change Equipment
transactions by choosing Structure Structure Graphic or Structure List from the menu.

Related Information

Resources [page 200]

8.1.11 Locating Addresses

Enables the automatic, geographical localization of addresses for business partners (customer or vehicle
depot) and plants.

Prerequisites

You have installed map material from the company PTV and the corresponding geocoding services. You have to
acquire this software separately.

You can also use another map service. You can introduce it in a separate project.

You have defined service groups in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Geographical Services Define
Technical Parameters for Map Services . The service groups US01 and EU01 are included in the standard
system.

You have implemented geocoding in the Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Geographical Services
System Modifications Business Add-Ins Implement Geocoding .

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 221
Use

The source of the geographical coordinates is the geocoding service. The geographical coordinates determined
are saved in the table GEOLOC in decimal format and linked via the address of the business partner or plant. An
example of the decimal format: Latitude 53.551085000000 and longitude 9.993682000000.

The geographical coordinates of the object are displayed in the transaction BPEdit Business Partner on the tab
Geocoordinates / Delivery Zones.

Activities

You can find the report in the SAP Menu under S4SCSD S4IDM Geographical Data Perform Locating .

Start the transaction Perform Locating. Define a new query or change an existing query. You will be guided
through the process step by step.

Save the data with Save Selected Coordinates.

The automatically determined coordinates can be changed manually. Save the changes using Save Selected
Coordinates.

You can also change the coordinates of an object later. Search for this very object and change the coordinates
manually.

8.1.12 Trip Confirmation with Data Collation

Describes how a Trip Planning trip can be confirmed in the data collation.

Use

You can use trip confirmation to confirm trips from Trip Planning of Integrated Dispatch Management (IDM) in
data collation.

Application Help for S4SCSD


222 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
The following graphic shows the processes:

Prerequisites

You have installed Integrated Dispatch Management (IDM) and Data Collation.

You have configured the relevant settings in Customizing for S4SCSD, under Data Collation (DC) Data
Collation Documents Configure Mapping for IDM Item Data .

Activities

1. From the SAP Menu, choose S4SCSD Data Collation (DC) Start Data Collation . The Process
Automation Toolset screen appears.
2. Choose the IDMVEHICLE - Data Collation with IDM Transportation Planning
Connectivity document category. Choose Continue. The Data Collation screen appears.
3. Choose New. Enter the trip number or select it from the hit list. Only trips that are released and that have
not yet been transferred to a PAT document are displayed in the hit list.
To display all trips, choose Show Search Criteria. Select the entry Display PAT Trips and the value
True. Choose Find.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 223
4. To edit the information, select a trip.
5. Save your changes. Post the document.

Related Information

Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) [page 170]


Data Collation (DC) [page 125]

8.1.13 Trip-Related Data Collation

Describes trip-related data collation in IDM.

Prerequisites

Customizing

In Customizing for S4SCSD, you have made the settings under Data Collation (DC) .

In Customizing, you can configure that a released trip in Trip Planning in IDM is automatically transferred to the
trip-related data collation. To do so, choose the following in Customizing for S4SCSD: S4IDM Trip Planning
Actions and Context Menu Configure Actions . Select the trip category and choose Assign Action Group to
Trip Category. Select Action Group for User Actions, choose Assign Method to Action. Set method 2 for the
Release Trip action in the Method column.

Master Data

In the S4SCSD menu, you have made the following settings under Data Collation (DC) Master Data :

● You have defined the default values for the units of measure under Determine Units of Measure.
You can make this setting so that the units of measure are found automatically when entering the data
collation document. If you do not make this setting, the unit of measure in the material master is
suggested.
● Assign a plant to the equipment vehicle under Assign Plant to Equipment Vehicle.
● Under Set the Difference Quantity Tolerance, the tolerances for the difference quantities and the methods
are set.

For trip-related data collation, inventory management is performed for the means of transport. Stock may only
remain at the end if it is explicitly declared as remaining quantity. Meaning that certain tolerances for gain and
loss are possible.

You can find the methods for gains and losses in Customizing for Data Collation (DC) under:

● General Settings Process Data Collation Event Methods Check .


● Data Collation Documents Specify Document Type for document type VEHICLE.

Application Help for S4SCSD


224 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
Manual Process Flow

Create Data Collation Document

1. From the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP Menu S4SCSD Integrated Dispatch
Management (S4IDM) Start Trip-Related Data Collation . The Data Collation screen appears. The data
collation type Trip-Related Data Collation and the document type IDMVEHICLE are also displayed.
2. Choose New.
3. Enter header data if required. Insert one or more items. To do so, choose Add Item. The document has
status A.
Continue with step 5 in the next section Perform Data Collation.

Post a data collation document

1. From the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, select the data collation type by choosing SAP Menu
S4SCSD Data Collation (DC) . The Data Collation screen appears. The data collation type is also
displayed.
2. Choose Locator. The locator area is displayed. Enter the search criteria. Choose Find. The documents
found are displayed in the results list.
3. Select a document. The document data is displayed in the right-hand screen area.
To close the locator, choose Locator. This leaves more space to display the data.
4. Choose Edit. The document has status A. Edit the data.
You can also deactivate a document. The status is then G. After this, the document can no longer be edited
or deleted.
5. Choose Verify. The status changes to B.
6. Choose Release. The status changes to C.
7. Save the document.
8. Choose Process. The status changes to F. The data collation document was posted.

Related Information

Data Collation (DC) [page 125]


Document Categories and Item Categories in Data Collation [page 144]

8.1.14 PPF integration

Describes how to use the Post Processing Framework (PPF) in IDM.

Use

IDM is connected to the PPF.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) PUBLIC 225
This enables actions to be performed automatically based on certain conditions. The actions are executed
immediately with each save or at a later time. You assign the actions to an action profile in Customizing.

You can define actions for the following processes:

● Calling methods
● Printing or sending forms
● Starting a workflow

Activities

You configure the relevant settings in Customizing for S4SCSD under S4IDM Trip Planning General
Settings Maintain PPF Settings .

Application Help for S4SCSD


226 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)
9 Integrated Dispatch Management (App)

You can use this app to plan and monitor your outbound delivery tours.

Features

This app provides the following key feature:

● Trip planning

Trip Planning provides you with the following functions:

● Road map
● Document overview
● Gantt chart
● Resource list
● Vehicle chart
● Multi-function
● Change start variant

This app uses the following CDS views:

● /BTL/TRL_TRIP_DOC_DISPATCHER
● /BTL/TRL_TRIP_DOC_HEADER_DSPCH
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_DRIVER_VH
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_DRIVERS
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_LOAD_ITM_CAT
● /BTL/TRL_GRID_ITEM_CAT_TXT
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_LOADING
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_UNLOADING
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_UNLOAD_COUNT
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_TRIP_HIERAR
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_TRIP
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_VEHICLE_VH
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_VEHICLES
● /BTL/TRM_ODATA_IDM_DOC_UOM
● /BTL/TRM_UOM_TXT
● /BTL/TRL_TRIP_DRIVER
● /BTL/TRL_TRIP_RESOURCE
● /BTL/TRL_GRID_ITEM_CAT_TXT
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_LOADING
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_TRIP_HIERAR
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_TRIP

Application Help for S4SCSD


Integrated Dispatch Management (App) PUBLIC 227
● /BTL/TRL_ODATA_UNLOADING

Supported Device Types

● Desktop

Supported Browsers

● Chrome

Related Information

Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) [page 170]


Trip Planning (TP) [page 174]

Application Help for S4SCSD


228 PUBLIC Integrated Dispatch Management (App)
10 Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area

Here you find all archiving objects for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution 2.0.

Objects in S4SCSD Archiving Object

Notes (S4SCSD) /ICO/NOTE

Interfaces (S4SCSD) /ICO/OOIF

DC documents /PAT/DOCS

RFNO payment cards /ICO/RNPC

RFNO inbound process data /ICO/RNPOS

IDM archiving object /BTL/ARC

Related Information

Archiving Notes Using /ICO/NOTE [page 229]


Archiving Interface Documents Using /ICO/OOIF [page 231]
Archiving DC Documents with /PAT/DOCS [page 233]
Archiving RFNO Payment Cards Using /ICO/RNPC [page 237]
Archiving of RFNO Inbound Process Data Using /ICO/RNPOS [page 239]
Archive IDM Data with /BTL/ARC [page 242]

10.1 Archiving Notes Using /ICO/NOTE

You can use the archiving object /ICO/NOTE to archive notes and their long texts.

The following programs are provided:

Program Function

/ICO/MO_RAD41 Write

/ICO/MO_RAD42 Delete

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 229
Program Function

/ICO/MO_RAD43 Read

/ICO/MO_NO_DELETE Preparation

The content of the following tables is archived:

Table Description

/ICO/MO_NO_NOTIZ Notes

In addition, the TEXT archiving class is used.

The following table shows the tables from which documents are to be deleted:

Delete Tables

Table Description

STXB SAPscript: Texts in Non-SAPscript Format

STXH STXD SAPscript Text File Header

STXL STXD SAPscript Text File Lines

The following table shows the tables from which documents are to be archived:

Archiving Tables

Table Description

THEAD SAPscript: Text Header

TLINE SAPscript: Text Lines

Call

To call the archiving function for notes, open the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen and choose SAP Menu
S4SCSD Tele Sales (TS) Notes Archive Notes .

The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The /ICO/NOTE archiving object has already been entered.
You can now start all archiving processes.

Application Help for S4SCSD


230 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Prerequisites

For a note to be archived, at least one of the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

● The deletion indicator for the note is set.


● On the selection screen, the indicator Incl. Notes Without Deletion Ind. is set.

Defining Write Variants

The variant contains the selection criteria for the notes that you want to archive.

You can select the notes to be archived using the following criteria:

● Note data
● General data
● Organizational data

You have the following options:

● Test mode
Write is simulated. No archive file is created.
● Production mode
The archive files are created. The statistics created in the process contain, among other things, the table
entries that were written to the archive, as well as the size and number of the generated archive files.

Displaying Notes Archived Using /ICO/NOTE

To call the archiving function for notes, on the SAP Easy Access SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary
distribution (S4SCSD) screen, choose SAP Menu Tele Sales (TS) Notes Archiving Archive Notes .

The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The /ICO/NOTE archiving object has already been entered.
You can now start all archiving processes.

You can use the Archive Information System (transaction code SARI) to display archived notes, provided that
an archive infostructure has already been defined.

10.2 Archiving Interface Documents Using /ICO/OOIF

You can use the archiving object /ICO/OOIF to archive interface documents.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 231
The following table shows the delivered programs:

Programs

Program Function

/ICO/MO_OOIF_ARCHIVE_WRI Write

/ICO/MO_OOIF_ARCHIVE_DEL Delete

The following table shows the tables from which documents are to be archived or deleted:

Archiving or Delete Tables

Table Description

/ICO/MO_OOIF_DOC Management table for interface documents of all types

/PAT/RS_DOCFLOW Document flow

Call

To call the archiving function for documents, on the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP Menu
S4SCSDInterfaces Tools Archive Interface Documents . The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears.
The archiving object /ICO/OOIF is already entered. You can now start all archiving processes.

Checks

The following mandatory and optional checks are performed for interface documents before they can be
archived.

● Archivability of the document status (mandatory)


● Other checks, configurable in Customizing (optional)

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites need to be fulfilled before an interface document can be archived:

● You have set the document status as archivable in Customizing, under Define Document Status for
Archiving or Deletion.
● You can configure the optional checks related to the follow-on document in Customizing, under Extension
of Archivability Check.

Application Help for S4SCSD


232 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Performing Application-Specific Configuration of /ICO/OOIF

If you want to archive additional entries in customer-defined document tables, an archiving class must exist,
which you assign to the interface in Customizing under Define Interface.

Defining Write Variants

The variant contains the selection criteria for the interface documents that you want to archive.

You can select the interface documents to be archived using the following criteria:

● Interface
● Document number
● Created on
● Document status

You have the following options:

● Test mode
Write is simulated. No archive file is created.
● Production mode
The archive files are created. The statistics created in the process contain, among other things, the table
entries that were written to the archive, as well as the size and number of the generated archive files.

Displaying Interface Documents Archived Using /ICO/OOIF

You can use the Archive Information System (transaction code SARI) to display archived interface documents,
provided that an archive infostructure has already been defined.

10.3 Archiving DC Documents with /PAT/DOCS

You can use the archiving object /PAT/DOCSto archive data collation (DC) documents.

The following table shows the delivered programs:

Programs

Program Function

/PAT/DOCS_ARCHIVE_WRI Write

/PAT/DOCS_ARCHIVE_DEL Delete

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 233
The following table shows the tables to be archived for the archiving object/PAT/DOCS:

Archiving Tables

Table Description

/PAT/METADOCS Document metaview

/PAT/POSTING_INF Time stamp for posting in PAT

/PAT/RS_DOCFLOW Document flow

/PAT/STATUS Posting status

In addition, the CHANGEDOCU archiving class is used.

The following table shows the tables to be archived:

Table Description

CDKEYTAB Structure of the transfer table archiving class CHANGE­


DOCU

CDHDR Change document header

CDPOS Change document item

CDPOS_STR Additional change document - table for STRINGS

CDPOS_UID Additional table for inclusion of TABKEY >70 characters

Tables for Archiving Class /ICO/RN_PA

The following table shows the tables to be archived depending on the document schema:

Table Description Document Schema Document Schema Document Schema


Clearing House Set­ Dealer Settlement Payment Card Con­
tlement CSN with Forecourt DSA tract Settlement PSN

/ICO/RN_PATCSH Clearing House Settle­ x


ment header

/ICO/RN_PATCSITM Clearing House Settle­ x


ment items

/ICO/RN_PATDSH Dealer Settlement x


header

/ICO/RN_PATDSITM Dealer Settlement x


items

Application Help for S4SCSD


234 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Table Description Document Schema Document Schema Document Schema
Clearing House Set­ Dealer Settlement Payment Card Con­
tlement CSN with Forecourt DSA tract Settlement PSN

/ICO/RN_PATDSMR Dealer Settlement me­ x


ters

/ICO/RN_PATPA Partners in RFNO-PAT x x x


documents

/ICO/RN_PATPSH Settlement payment x


card contract header

/ICO/RN_PATPSITM Settlement payment x


card contract item

/ICO/RN_CTRLOV Control overview for x x x

AMDP aggregation

/ICO/RN_IF_POSTR RFNO inbound process x x x

data

Tables for Archiving Class /PAT/DC

The following table shows the tables to be archived:

Table Description

/PAT/DC_ADQTY Additional quantities

/PAT/DC_COND Pricing conditions

/PAT/DC_CONVERS QCI conversion parameters

/PAT/DC_DATES Additional date specifications

/PAT/DC_DCDOCS Involved data collation documents

/PAT/DC_EXTDTL External Details

/PAT/DC_HEAD Header data

/PAT/DC_HITEM Header data of target document

/PAT/DC_ITEM Item data

/PAT/DC_MATDOCS Involved material documents

/PAT/DC_MMACC Account assignment fields in purchasing

/PAT/DC_MMDOCS Involved purchasing documents

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 235
Table Description

/PAT/DC_MULTIREF Document assignment for data collation item

/PAT/DC_PARTNER Partner

/PAT/DC_RBMAT Materials from reclassification

/PAT/DC_SDDOCS Involved sales documents

/PAT/DC_TAS Additional data TAS

 Note

You can assign the archiving class to a document schema in Customizing for SAP Easy Access Main Menu,
under S4SCSDData Collation (DC) Process Automation Toolset (PAT) Document Define Document
Schema .

Call

To call the archiving function for DC documents, on the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP
Menu S4SCSD Data Collation (DC) Archive Data Collation Documents .

To call the archiving function for RFNO documents, on the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP
Menu S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Tools Archive PAT-RFNO Documents .

In both cases, the Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The archiving object /PAT/DOCS is already
entered. You can now start the archiving processes Write and Delete.

Checks

The following mandatory and optional checks are performed for /PAT/DOCS before they can be archived:

● Archivability of the document status (mandatory)


● Residence time (optional)
● Other checks, configurable in Customizing (optional)

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites need to be fulfilled before a PAT-RFNO document can be archived:

● You have set the document status as archivable in Customizing, under Define Document Status.

Application Help for S4SCSD


236 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
● You have entered the residence time in Customizing, under Document Schema.
● You can configure the optional checks relating to the tables of the document schema in Customizing under
Define Document Schema.

Perform Application-Specific Configuration of /PAT/DOCS

The tables of the document schemas from which archiving is to be performed are determined using the
archiving class. You need to assign the archiving class to the document schema in Customizing, under Define
Document Schema.

Defining Write Variants

The variant contains the selection criteria for the PAT-RFNO documents that you want to archive.

You can select the PAT-RFNO documents to be archived using the following criteria:

● Application
● Document category
● Document number
● Document status
● Document schema
● Created on

You have the following options:

● Test mode
Write is simulated. No archive file is created.
● Production mode
The archive files are created. The statistics created in the process contain, among other things, the table
entries that were written to the archive, as well as the size and number of the generated archive files.

Displaying Documents Archived with /PAT/DOCS

You can use the Archive Information System (transaction code SARI) to display archived PAT-RFNO
documents, provided that you have already defined an archive infostructure.

10.4 Archiving RFNO Payment Cards Using /ICO/RNPC

You can use the archiving object /ICO/RNPC to archive payment cards.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 237
Structure

Programs

The following table shows the delivered programs:

Programs

Program Function

/ICO/RN_PC_ARCHIVE_WRI Write

/ICO/RN_PC_ARCHIVE_DEL Delete

Tables for Archiving Object /ICO/RNPC

The following table shows the tables to be archived:

Archiving Tables

Table Description

/ICO/RN_PCAPPROV Payment card releases

/ICO/RN_PCBLOCK Payment card blocks

/ICO/RN_PCIMPR Embossing orders for payment cards

/ICO/RNM_PC Payment cards

/ICO/RNM_PCACLO Points of acceptance of a payment card

/ICO/RNM_PCBS Bonus system (payment cards)

Call

To call the archiving function for payment cards, on the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen, choose SAP
Menu S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Tools Archive Payment Cards .

The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The archiving object /ICO/RNPC is already entered. You can
now start the archiving processes Write and Delete.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites need to be fulfilled before a payment card can be archived:

● The payment card has the status Flagged for Deletion.


● The date in the field <Valid To> must lie within the archiving period.

Application Help for S4SCSD


238 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Defining Write Variants

The variant contains the selection criteria for the payment cards that you want to archive.

You can select the payment cards to be archived using the following criteria:

● GUID of payment card


● Validity period

You have the following options:

● Test mode
Write is simulated. No archive file is created.
● Production mode
The archive files are created. The statistics created in the process contain, among other things, the table
entries that were written to the archive, as well as the size and number of the generated archive files.

Displaying Payment Cards Archived Using /ICO/RNPC

You can use the Archive Information System (transaction code SARI) to display archived PAT-RFNO
documents, provided that you have already defined an archive infostructure.

10.5 Archiving of RFNO Inbound Process Data Using /ICO/


RNPOS

You can use archiving object /ICO/RNPOS to archive RFNO inbound process data, as well as the corresponding
control data.

Structure

Programs

The following table shows the delivered programs:

Programs

Program Function

/ICO/RN_INBOUND_ARCHIVE_WRI Write

/ICO/RN_INBOUND_ARCHIVE_DEL Delete

Tables for Archiving Object /ICO/RNPOS

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 239
The following table shows the tables to be archived:

Archiving Tables

Table Description

/ICO/RN_CTRLOV Control overview for AMDP aggregation

/ICO/RN_IF_POSTR RFNO inbound process data

Call

To call the archiving function for RFNO inbound process data, on the SAP Easy Access Main Menu screen,
choose SAP Menu S4SCSD Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) Tools Archive RFNO Inbound
Process Data .

The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The archiving object /ICO/RNPOS is already entered. You
can now start the archiving processes Write and Delete.

Checks

The following mandatory and optional checks are performed for RFNO inbound process data before it can be
archived.

● The control data must have the Processing Completed indicator (mandatory).
● The RFNO document must have the status Posted or Deactivated (mandatory).

ILM-Based Information for the Archiving Object

You can use this archiving object with the ICO_RNPOS ILM object as part of SAP Information Lifecycle
Management.

The following fields for ICO_RNPOS are defined in the ILM policy and visible in the ILM Policies application:

● Available time references


○ Creation date CREATION_DATE
● Available time offsets
○ End of the month END_OF_MONTH
● Available policy categories
○ RST: Retention period
○ RTP: Retention rules

Application Help for S4SCSD


240 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Defining Write Variants

The variant contains the selection criteria for the RFNO inbound process data that you want to archive.

You can select the RFNO inbound process data to be archived using the following criteria:

● Source data information


○ Source ID
○ Source data type
○ Client number
○ Document number POS data source
○ Document type
○ Preceding document number
● Location parameter
○ Company code
○ RFNO location ID
○ External RFNO location ID
○ RFNO location type
● Map parameters
○ Payment card definition ID
○ Payment card type
○ Payment card contract type ID
○ Payment card contract number
○ Definition ID
○ Version

You can restrict the selection criteria based on the following criteria:

● Created On
● Created By
● Changed On
● Changed By

You have the following options:

● Test mode
Write is simulated. No archive file is created.
● Production mode
The archive files are created. The statistics created in the process contain, among other things, the table
entries that were written to the archive, as well as the size and number of the generated archive files.

Displaying Archived RFNO Inbound Process Data Using /ICO/RNPOS

You can use the Archive Information System (transaction code SARI) to display archived RFNO inbound
process data, provided you have already defined an archive information structure.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 241
Authorizations

To create archives and start the deletion program, you require authorization of authorization object
S_ARCHIVE with the following properties:

● Name of application area: IS


● Name of archiving object: /ICO/RNPOS
● Activities on the archiving object and application area: 01

10.6 Archive IDM Data with /BTL/ARC

You can use the archiving object /BTL/ARC to archive trips from Integrated Dispatch Management (IDM).

The following table shows the delivered programs:

Programs
Program Function

/BTL/ILM_ARCHIVE_WRI Write

/BTL/ILM_ARCHIVE_DEL Delete

The following table shows the tables to be archived for the archiving object /BTL/ARC:

Archiving Tables
Table Description

/BTL/TR_DOCFLOW IDM document flow

/BTL/TR_DOCFLOWH Header table: IDM document flow

/BTL/TR_NAST IDM documents

/BTL/TR_REQ_PARA Route request parameter

/BTL/TR_ROUTE Routes

/BTL/TR_STOP_SEQ Route sequence

/BTL/TR_TRIPA Activity

/BTL/TR_TRIPD Documents

/BTL/TR_TRIPE Allocation of the equipment to the trip

/BTL/TR_TRIPG Group data

/BTL/TR_TRIPI Item data

/BTL/TR_TRIPK KPI for the trip

/BTL/TR_TRIPM Material movement

/BTL/TR_TRIPT Header data

/BTL/TR_TRIPU Transport units

Application Help for S4SCSD


242 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
Table Description

/BTL/TR_USE_PARA Parameter to be used for a route request

/BTL/TRM_BUDRVTL Assignment of driver to vehicle depot

/BTL/TRM_BUKRED Assign business partner to a vendor

/BTL/TRM_BUPL Assign business partner to plant

/BTL/TRM_CU_ADD BAG Additional data: KPI for each business partner

/BTL/TRM_DRVADD Additional driver data

/BTL/TRM_DRVAV Driver availability

/BTL/TRM_DRVLI Licenses and permits for the driver

/BTL/TRM_TL_ADD Vehicle depot - additional data

/BTL/TRM_TLEQ Assign equipment to the business partner

/BTL/TRM_TLEQ_D Assign default equipment to the business partner

/BTL/TRM_TLTU Assign transport unit to the business partner

/BTL/TRM_TLTU_V Assign transport unit to the BP with validity

/ICO/MOM_BUDLVZN Delivery zone assignment to business partner address

Call

To call the archiving function for IDM documents, open the SAP Easy Access screen and choose SAP Menu
S4SCSD Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) Administration Archive IDM Documents .

The Archive Administration: Initial Screen appears. The archiving object /BTL/IDM is already entered. You can
now start the archiving processes Write and Delete.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before an IDM document can be archived:

● The archiving object /BTL/ARC has to be assigned to ILM object /BTL/ILM.


● You must have defined an audit area and a retention rule.
● The overall status of the header data is Completely Posted.
● The retention time must have expired (optional).
● The retention period must have expired (mandatory).

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 243
ILM-Based Information for the Archiving Object

You can use this archiving object with the /BTL/ILM ILM object as part of SAP Information Lifecycle
Management.

● Available Time Bases


○ END_OF_MONTH
○ End of the year END_OF_YEAR

● Available Condition Fields


○ End DateENDDATE
○ Header Status HSTATUS
● Available Rule Set Categories
○ Residence Rules RST
○ Retention Rules End of the Month RTP

Performing Application-Specific Configuration

Before you can use the archiving object IDM Document, you must have configured the following settings.

● You have defined an audit area.


● You have assigned the ILM object to the audit area /BTL/ILM.
● You have defined an ILM rule.
● You have defined the retention rules.

The assignment of an ILM object to an audit area is a prerequisite so you can create the rule for ILM objects. To
create rules that are specifically intended for a department, you must create an audit area that contains the
same ILM objects for each department.

You can create audit areas only in the Z namespace. The source audit area for a merger with another audit area
must also be in a Z namespace. In order to change an audit area delivered by SAP or to use an audit area for a
merger, you must copy it into the Z namespace.

This is how to create an audit area:

1. Start the transaction ILMARA.


2. Choose New.
3. Enter a name in the Z namespace and a description for the audit area.
4. Save your entries in a Customizing transport request.
5. Set the rule category.
6. Assign the ILM object to the audit area.

It is always necessary to define an ILM guideline for an ILM object belonging to an audit area. When you select a
category of the guidelines, you define the rule structure for these guidelines. The manner in which the
guidelines are defined for an ILM object depends on the settings for the ILM object within an object category.
You can define multiple rules for each guideline.

SAP supports the following guideline types:

● RTP retention rules are mandatory

Application Help for S4SCSD


244 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
● RST residence rules are optional

This is how to create an ILM guideline:

1. Start the transaction IRMPOL.


2. Enter the data.
3. Choose New.
4. In order to include the condition fields or standard condition fields that are available for an ILM object in the
rules of the guideline, you must copy these fields from the table Available Condition Fields to the
tableSelected Condition Fields.
5. Save your entries in a Customizing transport request.

This is how to create a rule for your ILM guideline:

1. Start the transaction IRMPOL.


2. Enter the data. Choose Continue.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Enter data for the following fields in the area Rules for Policy:
○ Condition Field Values
○ Minimum Retention Period
○ Maximum Retention Period
○ Unit for Retention Period
○ Time Reference
○ Time Offset
○ ILM Store (if necessary)
○ Content Repository and Log. File (as an alternative to the ILM store). You can add these fields in the
settings dialog.
○ Rule Number
○ Rule Priority
5. Click Add. Save your entries in a Customizing transport request.
6. Set the status to Productive.

You can simulate the settings in the transaction ILMSIM.

Defining Write Variants

A write variant contains the parameters for the IDM documents that you want to archive.

● Trip Category
Choose the trip category for which the archiving program is to be used.
● Header Status
Always select the status Fully Posted.
● End Date
Select the end date of the trip as a reference for the calculation of the retention rule.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area PUBLIC 245
Authorizations for S_ARCHIVE

Activity Required Authorization Object

01 S_ARCHIVE

Display Archived IDM Documents with /BTL/ARC

The accompanying field catalog is /BTL/ARC.

The corresponding info structure is /BTL/IS_ARC.

Application Help for S4SCSD


246 PUBLIC Data Archiving in the S4SCSD 2.0 Area
11 Data Aging in S4SCSD 2.0

This function allows you to move large amounts of data inside a database to free up working memory.

The data is moved from the current area (hot) to the historical area (cold). This has a positive impact on
performance. This means that large amounts of data can be queried in a much shorter time.

You configure the settings for S4SCSD in Customizing for S4SCSD under General Settings Configure Data
Aging .

Related Information

Available Data Aging Objects [page 247]

11.1 Available Data Aging Objects

Here is a list of the available data aging objects for SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain for secondary distribution 2.0
(S4SCSD 2.0).

S4SCSD 2.0 supports data aging and provides these data aging objects:

Available Data Aging Objects


Technical Name of Data Aging Object Name of Data Aging Object

/ICO/RN_DA RFNO-PAT documents data aging

/ICO/RN_DA_CSR Continuous Station Replenishment (CSR)

/ICO/RN_DA_IN RFNO data aging inbound

/ICO/RN_DA_PC Payment cards

/PAT/DC_DA Data collation PAT documents data aging

/PAT/DC_DA_DI Data collation data aging interfaces

/ICO/RN_DA_RI RFNO data aging interfaces IS

/BTL/IDM_DA BTL/IDM data aging

Application Help for S4SCSD


Data Aging in S4SCSD 2.0 PUBLIC 247
Related Information

Data Aging in S4SCSD 2.0 [page 247]

Application Help for S4SCSD


248 PUBLIC Data Aging in S4SCSD 2.0
12 Business Functions S4SCSD

Various business functions are available in S4SCSD.

● Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD)


● Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)
● Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution
● Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)

Related Information

Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD) [page 249]


Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 251]
Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution [page 252]
Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) [page 253]

12.1 Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD)

Use

Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /ICO/SFW_OGSD_BF

Type of Business Function Industry Business Function

Available From SAP S4SCSD FPS02

Technical Usage Oil & Gas

Application Component Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution

IS-OIL-DS-OGSD

Required Business Function Business Function Basis (COM)


(BUSINESS_FUNCTION_BASIS_COM)

and

Commodity Management and Bulk Logistics


(COMMODITY_MGMT_&_BULK_LOGISTIC)

You can use this business function to activate the functions of Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD). With
OGSD you can manage all business processes required in the petroleum trade with end customers,

Application Help for S4SCSD


Business Functions S4SCSD PUBLIC 249
wholesalers, resellers, or service stations. The component comprises the purchase, storage, transportation,
and sale of fuels and lubricants.

Prerequisites

● You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features


Only

Software Component S4SCSD

Features

Tele Sales

Tele Sales helps you to create sales documents by providing a number of background data about your
customer. You have direct access to financial data, order history and customer specific notes.

Data Collation

Data Collation helps you to post complex logistics business processes especially for Oil and Gas Downstream
by entering only reference data (e.g. reference document, business partner) and after-the-fact data like
changed quantities for loading, sales, and unloading. Data Collation then makes the necessary adjustments in
existing logistics documents and creates all required follow-up documents.

Interfaces

Interfaces helps you to integrate external data from partners such as depots and haulers received via ALE or
flat files. Interfaces can verify and convert received data and then feeds it to Data Collation. By combining
Interfaces and Data Collation a high grade of automation in logistics processes can be achieved.

Continuous Product Replenishment

This process provides your customers with a steady supply of products based on their requirements by
continuously calculating and monitoring the expected material consumption.

Application Help for S4SCSD


250 PUBLIC Business Functions S4SCSD
12.2 Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO)

Use

Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /ICO/SFW_RFNO_BF

Type of Business Function Industry Business Function

Available From SAP S4SCSD FPS02

Technical Usage Oil & Gas

Application Component Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution (IS-OIL-DS-OGSD)

Required Business Function Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD) (/ICO/


SFW_OGSD_BF)

You can use this business function to activate the functions of Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO). With
RFNO you can manage your service station network, manage your stock, settle with your dealers or a clearing
house and manage your fleet cards. You can integrate the S4SCSD interfaces to receive the POS data via IDocs.

Integration

RFNO uses the master data of IS-OIL-DS-MRN.

Prerequisites

● You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features


Only

Software Component S4SCSD

Features

Retail Fuel Network Operations Document

You can create RFNO documents for the collection and settlement of sales processes at service stations. You
can post RFNO documents and thus make a settlement to dealers or clearing houses.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Business Functions S4SCSD PUBLIC 251
Fleet Card Management

You can create and manage fleet cards for end customers. You can maintain the validity of a fleet card and
enter approved products. You can induce the embossing of a fleet card on your embossing machine.

Enhancements in the SAP Business Partner

You can use additional roles, such as dealer, payment card owner, and payment card payer, and assign these
roles to a business partner.

Related Information

Retail Fuel Network Operations (RFNO) [page 57]

12.3 Supply Chain for Secondary Distribution

Use

Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /ICO/SFW_SCSD_BF

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP S4SCSD FPS02

Technical Usage Oil & Gas

Application Component Oil & Gas Secondary Distribution (IS-OIL-DS-OGSD)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to activate the standard customizing.

Prerequisites

● You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features


Only

Software Component S4SCSD

Application Help for S4SCSD


252 PUBLIC Business Functions S4SCSD
Features

Activating standard customizing

You can activate the standard customing for S4SCSD.

12.4 Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM)

Use

Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /BTL/SFW_S4IDM_BF

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP S4SCSD 2.0

Technical Usage Oil & Gas

Application Component Oil&Gas Secondary Distribution (OGSD) (/ICO/


SFW_OGSD_BF)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to activate the functions of Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM). With
S4IDM you can manage your your outbound delivery tours. S4IDM is an application that supports and
automates your dispatching. It provides effective support for dispatch planners. Orders are combined with
existing resources, such as vehicles or service staff, in the best possible way.

Prerequisites

● You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features


Only

Software Component S4SCSD 2.0

Features

Road Map

Application Help for S4SCSD


Business Functions S4SCSD PUBLIC 253
The route and various objects that are in the delivery zones that you selected in the start parameters are
denoted by various objects on the road map.

Gantt Chart

The trips created are displayed in a Gantt chart.

Recourses List

You can select and assign these resources to transport units.

Document Overview

Display various documents about loading and unloading.

Transport View

Shows a graphical overview of the tranport units. The filling stands of the compartments are displayed.

Related Information

Integrated Dispatch Management (S4IDM) [page 170]

Application Help for S4SCSD


254 PUBLIC Business Functions S4SCSD
Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Hyperlinks
Some links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.
About the icons:

● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your
agreements with SAP) to this:

● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.
● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any
damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such
links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this
information.

Videos Hosted on External Platforms


Some videos may point to third-party video hosting platforms. SAP cannot guarantee the future availability of videos stored on these platforms. Furthermore, any
advertisements or other content hosted on these platforms (for example, suggested videos or by navigating to other videos hosted on the same site), are not within
the control or responsibility of SAP.

Beta and Other Experimental Features


Experimental features are not part of the officially delivered scope that SAP guarantees for future releases. This means that experimental features may be changed by
SAP at any time for any reason without notice. Experimental features are not for productive use. You may not demonstrate, test, examine, evaluate or otherwise use
the experimental features in a live operating environment or with data that has not been sufficiently backed up.
The purpose of experimental features is to get feedback early on, allowing customers and partners to influence the future product accordingly. By providing your
feedback (e.g. in the SAP Community), you accept that intellectual property rights of the contributions or derivative works shall remain the exclusive property of SAP.

Example Code
Any software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax
and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of
example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

Gender-Related Language
We try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.

Application Help for S4SCSD


Important Disclaimers and Legal Information PUBLIC 255
www.sap.com/contactsap

© 2020 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form


or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP
affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors


contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for


informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any
kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or
SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth
in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP
SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All
other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies.

Please see https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html for


additional trademark information and notices.

THE BEST RUN

You might also like